1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
68 \font_roman "default" "default"
69 \font_sans "default" "default"
70 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
71 \font_math "auto" "auto"
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \font_sf_scale 100 100
77 \font_tt_scale 100 100
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -195340706 "Georg Baum"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Note Note
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
505 Code box prevent that the term
506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
514 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
515 More about \SpecialChar TeX
516 Code is described in section
521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
523 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
527 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
528 is explained in section
533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
535 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
545 \begin_inset Index idx
548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
549 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
555 See section 5.1 of the
559 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
563 \begin_layout Chapter
564 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
568 \begin_layout Section
569 Basic File Operations
570 \begin_inset Index idx
573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
582 \begin_layout Standard
587 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
588 in addition to some more advanced operations:
591 \begin_layout Itemize
613 \begin_layout Itemize
629 arg "buffer-new-template"
635 \begin_layout Itemize
657 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
681 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
715 arg "buffer-write-as"
721 \begin_layout Itemize
735 \begin_layout Itemize
749 \begin_layout Standard
750 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
751 a few minor differences.
754 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
765 command lists the available templates.
766 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
767 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
768 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
776 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
783 \begin_layout Standard
784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
816 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
817 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
818 is just that — a big, blank space.
826 \begin_layout Standard
847 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
855 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
873 will reload the document from disk.
874 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
875 and want to restore it to the last save.
884 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
885 them as your changes.
888 \begin_layout Section
889 Basic Editing Features
890 \begin_inset Index idx
893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
902 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
909 \begin_layout Standard
910 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
911 can perform cut and paste operations
912 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
913 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
914 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
915 editing features and how to access
917 We will start with cut and paste.
920 \begin_layout Standard
921 As you might expect, the
925 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
926 various other editing features.
927 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
931 \begin_layout Itemize
937 \begin_inset Index idx
940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
969 \begin_layout Itemize
975 \begin_inset Index idx
978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1007 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset Index idx
1016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 \begin_layout Itemize
1045 \begin_inset space ~
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1069 \begin_inset space ~
1075 \begin_inset Index idx
1078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1087 \begin_inset Index idx
1090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1105 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1115 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1122 The first three are self-explanatory.
1123 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1124 and other programs by
1145 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1146 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1151 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1152 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1153 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1154 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1155 into individual cells.
1159 \begin_inset space ~
1164 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1165 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1169 \begin_layout Standard
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1178 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1180 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1195 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1196 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1197 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1203 \begin_inset space \space{}
1206 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1207 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1213 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1232 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1233 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1235 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1244 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1245 start a new paragraph.
1246 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1247 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1269 \begin_inset space ~
1272 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1275 paste from the primary selection.
1276 This is normally the currently selected text.
1279 \begin_layout Standard
1282 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1306 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1312 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 button to skip the current word.
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1338 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1342 \begin_inset space ~
1347 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1349 If the toggle is set, searching for
1350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 will not match the word
1362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1376 Match whole words only
1378 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1379 to only find complete words, e.
1380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 offers also an advanced
1412 \begin_inset space ~
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1421 feature that is described in sec.
1422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1428 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1435 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1437 \begin_inset space \space{}
1441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1449 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1451 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1456 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1463 \begin_layout Standard
1467 arg "inset-select-all"
1470 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1471 When the cursor is inside an inset
1474 arg "inset-select-all"
1477 selects the content of the inset.
1481 arg "inset-select-all"
1484 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1489 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1492 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1496 \begin_layout Section
1498 \begin_inset Index idx
1501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1508 \begin_inset Index idx
1511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1520 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1530 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1536 or the toolbar button
1542 to undo some mistake.
1543 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1548 or the toolbar button
1555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1562 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1566 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1569 \begin_layout Standard
1570 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1579 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1580 This is a consequence of the 100
1581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1584 step undo limit mentioned above.
1587 \begin_layout Standard
1596 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1598 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1602 \begin_layout Section
1604 \begin_inset Index idx
1607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1616 \begin_layout Standard
1617 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1625 \begin_layout Itemize
1630 once anywhere in the edit window.
1631 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1635 \begin_layout Enumerate
1640 \begin_layout Itemize
1647 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1653 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1654 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1658 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1668 \begin_layout Enumerate
1669 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1673 \begin_layout Standard
1674 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1675 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1679 \begin_layout Section
1681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1683 name "sec:Navigating"
1688 \begin_inset Index idx
1691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1702 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1710 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1711 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1714 \begin_layout Itemize
1715 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1717 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1719 \begin_inset space ~
1724 or by the toolbar button
1727 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1733 \begin_layout Itemize
1734 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1736 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1739 and use the same menu to return to them.
1740 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1743 \begin_layout Standard
1747 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1752 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1753 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1755 \begin_inset space ~
1760 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1761 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1762 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1763 your last editing position.
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1771 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1775 \begin_layout Subsection
1777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1779 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1787 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1788 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1789 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1797 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1801 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1808 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1813 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1817 \begin_layout Standard
1818 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1819 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1820 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1821 dialog and to modify the citation.
1824 \begin_layout Standard
1825 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1827 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1828 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1836 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1839 \begin_layout Standard
1840 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1841 you further to control the display.
1846 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1847 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1853 option keeps it in the current view state.
1854 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1862 3, the subsections of sections
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1866 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1871 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1872 \begin_inset space ~
1876 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1886 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1889 \begin_layout Standard
1896 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1897 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1911 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1912 So, for example, you can move section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1917 \begin_inset space ~
1920 2.4 or after section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1926 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1939 (or the corresponding key bindings
1947 ) you can change the level of sections.
1948 So you can for example make section
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1953 \begin_inset space ~
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_layout Section
1964 Input/Word Completion
1965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1967 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1972 \begin_inset Index idx
1975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_inset Index idx
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2018 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2020 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2021 is used to propose completions.
2024 \begin_layout Standard
2025 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2033 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2040 \begin_inset space ~
2044 \begin_inset space ~
2049 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2058 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2059 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2063 \begin_inset space ~
2069 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2070 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2071 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2072 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2077 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2078 completions available.
2083 key to accept a proposed completion.
2084 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2085 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2086 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2093 \begin_layout Standard
2094 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2095 ing options for text.
2096 The special math option
2100 enables characters to be composed.
2101 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2102 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2105 , you can then input the characters
2106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2117 to a formula to get it.
2118 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2119 of the math toolbar.
2120 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2124 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2125 's installation folder.
2126 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2135 \begin_layout Section
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_inset Index idx
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2213 \begin_layout Standard
2214 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2228 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2231 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2235 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2242 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2249 \begin_layout Standard
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2261 \begin_inset space ~
2282 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2286 \begin_layout Labeling
2287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2291 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2292 LatexCommand nomenclature
2294 description "Tabulator key"
2300 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2302 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2303 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2309 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2316 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2320 , especially section
2321 \begin_inset space ~
2325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2327 reference "subsec:Lists"
2333 If you are still confused, look in the
2338 \begin_inset Newline newline
2346 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2347 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2351 \begin_layout Labeling
2352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2356 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2357 LatexCommand nomenclature
2359 description "Escape key"
2366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2373 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2374 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2377 \begin_layout Labeling
2378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2384 \begin_inset space ~
2388 \begin_inset space ~
2395 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2396 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2400 \begin_layout Standard
2401 There are three modifier keys:
2404 \begin_layout Labeling
2405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2423 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2424 LatexCommand nomenclature
2426 description "Control key"
2430 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2431 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2435 \begin_layout Itemize
2444 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2447 \begin_layout Itemize
2456 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2459 \begin_layout Itemize
2468 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2472 \begin_layout Labeling
2473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2492 LatexCommand nomenclature
2494 description "Shift key"
2498 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2499 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2502 \begin_layout Labeling
2503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Alt or Meta key"
2528 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2529 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2530 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2536 \begin_inset Newline newline
2539 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2541 menu accelerator keys
2544 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2545 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2550 For example, the sequence
2551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2557 \begin_inset space ~
2561 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2594 \begin_inset space ~
2600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2610 \begin_layout Standard
2615 manual lists all other things bound to the
2623 \begin_layout Standard
2624 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2626 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2627 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2628 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2629 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2630 The \SpecialChar LyX
2631 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2632 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2633 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2635 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2651 followed by a capital
2658 \begin_layout Chapter
2661 \begin_inset Index idx
2664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_layout Section
2676 \begin_inset Index idx
2679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2688 \begin_layout Subsection
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2693 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2694 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2695 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2696 numbering schemes, and so on.
2697 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2698 and format the title of your document differently.
2701 \begin_layout Standard
2706 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2707 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2708 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2709 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2710 picks one for you by default.
2711 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2714 \begin_layout Subsection
2716 \begin_inset Index idx
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2728 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2735 \begin_layout Standard
2736 You can select a class using the
2738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2739 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2743 \begin_inset Index idx
2746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2753 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2757 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2761 \begin_layout Standard
2762 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Article for basic articles
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Report for basic reports
2775 \begin_layout Description
2776 Book for writing a book
2779 \begin_layout Description
2780 Letter for US-style letters
2783 \begin_layout Standard
2784 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2785 only uses if you have installed
2786 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2787 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2788 distributions will include
2790 Here are some of the classes.
2791 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2793 Special Document Classes
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2806 \begin_layout Description
2807 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2816 \begin_layout Description
2817 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2818 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2819 There are three article layouts available.
2820 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2821 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2822 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2823 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2828 sequential numbering
2829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2832 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2833 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2834 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2835 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2838 \begin_layout Description
2839 Beamer Layout for presentations
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2844 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2845 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2846 with \SpecialChar LyX
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2854 \begin_layout Description
2856 \begin_inset space ~
2859 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2866 \begin_layout Description
2867 Foils Used to make transparencies
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2872 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2873 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2874 with \SpecialChar LyX
2878 \begin_layout Description
2879 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2880 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2887 \begin_layout Description
2888 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2891 \begin_layout Description
2892 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2893 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2894 (Is used by this document.)
2897 \begin_layout Description
2898 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2901 \begin_layout Description
2902 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2905 \begin_layout Description
2910 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2911 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2913 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2917 \begin_layout Description
2918 Slides Used to make transparencies
2921 \begin_layout Description
2923 \begin_inset space ~
2926 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2927 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2930 \begin_layout Description
2931 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2937 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2943 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2944 of the document classes.
2947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2957 \begin_inset Index idx
2960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2978 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2980 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2983 \begin_layout Standard
2986 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2991 , are highly specialized.
2993 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2994 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2995 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2996 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2997 by some document class.
2998 There are just too many of them.
2999 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3002 \begin_layout Standard
3003 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3011 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3012 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3013 document class for a new file.
3015 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3020 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3029 manual for information on how to install them.
3030 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3036 \begin_layout Standard
3037 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3038 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3039 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3040 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 class files to be used for dissertation
3042 s submitted to those universities.
3043 The \SpecialChar LyX
3044 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3046 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3050 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3056 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3063 name "subsec:Modules"
3068 \begin_inset Index idx
3071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3080 \begin_layout Standard
3081 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3082 chosen document class.
3083 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3084 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3095 \begin_inset Index idx
3098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3105 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3109 \begin_layout Standard
3110 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3111 packages or file format converters that are not always
3112 installed by default.
3114 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3115 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3116 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3117 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3119 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3120 file without the missing prerequisites.
3121 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3122 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3133 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3152 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3164 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3166 will advise you about these things.
3174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3178 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3183 \begin_inset Index idx
3186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3187 Document ! Local Layout
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3196 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3197 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 : They are intended to be used in
3199 a variety of different documents.
3200 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3201 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3202 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3203 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3204 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3206 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3224 manual for information on how to use it.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3231 \begin_layout Standard
3232 Each class has a default set of options.
3233 Here's a quick table describing them:
3236 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3243 \begin_layout Standard
3245 \begin_inset Tabular
3246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3247 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3706 \begin_layout Standard
3707 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3713 \begin_layout Standard
3714 You're probably also wondering what
3715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3719 \begin_inset space ~
3723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3727 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3728 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3733 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3738 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3748 headings, there are also
3756 headings, and so on.
3757 We will describe these headings fully in section
3758 \begin_inset space ~
3762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3764 reference "subsec:Headings"
3771 \begin_layout Subsection
3773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3775 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3780 \begin_inset Index idx
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 \begin_inset Index idx
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3802 \begin_layout Standard
3803 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3820 \begin_inset space ~
3825 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3827 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3828 doesn't support special options you want to
3829 use for your document.
3830 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3831 -class and its options, you have to read
3835 \begin_layout Standard
3839 \begin_inset space ~
3846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3852 \begin_inset space ~
3857 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3858 You can choose between the following five options:
3861 \begin_layout Labeling
3862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3867 Use default page style of current class.
3870 \begin_layout Labeling
3871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3876 No page numbers or headings.
3879 \begin_layout Labeling
3880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3888 \begin_layout Labeling
3889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3894 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3895 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3896 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3897 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3900 \begin_layout Labeling
3901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3906 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3907 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3913 \begin_inset Index idx
3916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3918 -packages ! fancyhdr
3924 How they are defined is explained in section
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3931 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3938 \begin_layout Standard
3939 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3940 \begin_inset space ~
3944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3946 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3953 \begin_layout Subsection
3954 Paper Size and Orientation
3955 \begin_inset Index idx
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 Document ! Paper size
3965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3967 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3974 \begin_layout Standard
3975 You can find the following options in the menu
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3989 \begin_inset Index idx
3992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4001 \begin_layout Labeling
4002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4006 \begin_inset space ~
4011 What size paper to print on.
4016 \begin_layout Itemize
4022 \begin_layout Itemize
4028 \begin_layout Itemize
4034 \begin_layout Itemize
4040 \begin_layout Itemize
4043 US letter, US legal, US executive
4046 \begin_layout Itemize
4052 \begin_layout Itemize
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 To choose whether to output as
4076 \begin_layout Labeling
4077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4081 \begin_inset space ~
4086 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4087 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4090 \begin_layout Subsection
4092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4094 name "subsec:Margins"
4099 \begin_inset Index idx
4102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4109 \begin_inset Index idx
4112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4121 \begin_layout Standard
4122 Paper margins are set in the menu
4124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4128 \begin_inset Index idx
4131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4141 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4142 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4143 the paper format and the font size into account.
4146 \begin_layout Subsection
4150 \begin_layout Standard
4151 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4157 That includes the paragraph environments.
4158 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4159 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4160 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4162 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4171 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4173 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4174 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4175 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4178 \begin_layout Section
4179 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4180 \begin_inset Index idx
4183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4184 Paragraph ! Indentation
4192 \begin_layout Subsection
4194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4196 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4203 \begin_layout Standard
4204 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4205 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4208 \begin_layout Standard
4209 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4210 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4211 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4212 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4216 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4222 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4223 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4224 language than English.
4226 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4229 \begin_layout Standard
4230 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4231 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4232 into \SpecialChar LyX
4234 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4237 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4239 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4240 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4241 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4248 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4249 goes to produce a printable file.
4254 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4256 gives you the ability globally to change
4260 these pre-coded spacings.
4261 We will explain more later.
4264 \begin_layout Subsection
4265 Paragraph Separation
4266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4268 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4277 Paragraph ! Separation
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4301 \begin_inset space ~
4308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4312 \begin_inset Index idx
4315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4321 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4324 \begin_layout Subsection
4328 \begin_layout Standard
4329 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 dialog and toggle the
4342 \begin_inset space ~
4347 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4350 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4354 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4355 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4359 \begin_layout Standard
4360 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4361 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4364 \begin_layout Subsection
4366 \begin_inset Index idx
4369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4370 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4378 \begin_layout Standard
4381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4385 \begin_inset Index idx
4388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4401 \begin_inset space ~
4410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4417 \begin_inset Index idx
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 -packages ! setspace
4427 installed to use this feature.
4432 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4441 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4442 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4445 \begin_layout Section
4446 Paragraph Environments
4447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4449 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4454 \begin_inset Index idx
4457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4458 Paragraph ! Environments
4464 \begin_inset Index idx
4467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4468 Paragraph environments|(
4476 \begin_layout Subsection
4480 \begin_layout Standard
4481 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4484 \begin_layout Standard
4503 \begin_inset Newline newline
4506 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4508 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4509 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4510 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4519 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4522 \begin_layout Standard
4523 A paragraph environment is simply a
4524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4531 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4532 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4533 scheme, labels, and so on.
4534 Additionally, you can
4535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4542 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4543 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4544 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4545 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4547 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4549 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4552 \begin_layout Standard
4553 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4554 \begin_inset Graphics
4555 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4561 at the left end of the toolbar.
4563 will change the environment of the
4567 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4568 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4569 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4573 \begin_layout Standard
4582 create a new paragraph using the
4586 paragraph environment.
4588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4595 because if you are in one of these environments:
4598 \begin_layout Itemize
4604 \begin_layout Itemize
4610 \begin_layout Itemize
4616 \begin_layout Itemize
4622 \begin_layout Itemize
4628 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Itemize
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4642 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4646 , rather than resetting it to
4651 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4652 \begin_inset space ~
4656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4658 reference "sec:Nesting"
4665 \begin_layout Subsection
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 The default paragraph environment is
4675 It creates a plain paragraph.
4677 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4678 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4679 this manual) are in the
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4687 You can nest a paragraph using the
4691 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4699 \begin_layout Subsection
4701 \begin_inset Index idx
4704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4715 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4724 for thanks or contact information.
4725 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4726 places all of this on a separate page
4727 along with today's date.
4728 For other types of documents, the title
4729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4736 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4742 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4756 Here's how you use them:
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the title of your document in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 Put the author name in the
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4777 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4783 Note that using this environment is optional.
4784 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4785 will automatically insert today's date.
4786 If you don't want a date, use the option
4788 Suppress default date on front page
4792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4793 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4795 \begin_inset space ~
4803 \begin_layout Standard
4804 You can use footnotes to insert
4805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4812 or contact information.
4815 \begin_layout Subsection
4817 \begin_inset Index idx
4820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4829 name "subsec:Headings"
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4839 takes care of the numbering for you.
4842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4844 \begin_inset Index idx
4847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 Section headings ! Numbered
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4857 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4861 \begin_layout Enumerate
4867 \begin_layout Enumerate
4873 \begin_layout Enumerate
4879 \begin_layout Enumerate
4885 \begin_layout Enumerate
4891 \begin_layout Enumerate
4897 \begin_layout Enumerate
4903 \begin_layout Standard
4905 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4906 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4907 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4910 \begin_layout Standard
4911 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4912 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4913 You group the book into chapters.
4915 does a similar grouping:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4923 is divided into either
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4946 \begin_layout Itemize
4958 \begin_layout Itemize
4970 \begin_layout Itemize
4982 \begin_layout Itemize
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5003 Not all document types use the
5007 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5012 is the top-level heading.
5020 \begin_layout Standard
5025 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5026 labels it with its number,
5027 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5029 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5043 \begin_inset Index idx
5046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5047 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 The unnumbered section headings have a
5057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5064 at the end of their name.
5065 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5066 the table of contents, see section
5067 \begin_inset space ~
5071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5081 Changing the Numbering
5082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5084 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5091 \begin_layout Standard
5092 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5093 in the Table of Contents.
5094 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5096 Just as certain classes start with
5110 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5120 This is something you can change.
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5130 \begin_inset Index idx
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5142 \begin_inset space ~
5146 \begin_inset space ~
5151 you will see two counters.
5156 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5157 numbers a section heading.
5158 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5163 Short Titles of Headings
5164 \begin_inset Index idx
5167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5168 Section headings ! Short titles
5174 \begin_inset Argument 1
5177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5186 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5193 \begin_layout Standard
5194 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5195 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5196 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5197 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5202 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5203 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5204 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5205 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5210 \begin_inset space ~
5216 This will insert a box labeled
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset space ~
5225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5228 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5229 This also works for captions inside floats.
5230 There can only be one short title per title.
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 \begin_layout Standard
5242 The following information applies to all section headings:
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5253 \begin_layout Itemize
5254 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5257 \begin_layout Itemize
5258 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5261 \begin_layout Subsection
5265 \begin_layout Standard
5267 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5281 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5282 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5283 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5284 the text they contain.
5285 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5293 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5296 \begin_layout Standard
5297 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5306 when you start a new paragraph.
5307 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5311 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5312 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5313 have to change back to the
5317 environment yourself.
5320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5329 \begin_inset Index idx
5332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5341 \begin_layout Standard
5342 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5343 time for the differences.
5352 are identical except for one difference:
5356 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5365 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 Here's an example of the
5382 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5384 See – no indentation!
5388 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5389 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5390 the other paragraph.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 Here's another example, this time in the
5401 \begin_layout Quotation
5407 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5408 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5409 the first line, then
5413 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5417 you were quoting other text.
5420 \begin_layout Quotation
5421 Here's a new paragraph.
5422 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5423 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5427 As the examples show,
5431 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5432 They should put quotes in the
5437 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5441 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5446 \begin_inset Index idx
5449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5456 \begin_inset Index idx
5459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5480 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5486 \begin_inset Newline newline
5489 Which I did not rehearse!
5493 It could be much worse.
5494 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5496 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5497 indented a bit more than the first.
5498 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5504 \begin_inset Newline newline
5507 And make things look fine
5508 \begin_inset Newline newline
5514 arg "newline-insert newline"
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5525 does not indent both margins.
5526 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5527 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5530 arg "newline-insert newline"
5536 \begin_layout Subsection
5538 \begin_inset Index idx
5541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5557 \begin_layout Standard
5559 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5569 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5570 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5579 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5580 lets you provide your own label.
5581 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5582 describing some general features of all four of them.
5585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5589 \begin_layout Standard
5590 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5592 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5593 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5602 reset the environment to
5606 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5607 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5608 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5612 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5616 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5623 \begin_layout Standard
5624 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5625 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5626 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5628 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5629 you read all of section
5630 \begin_inset space ~
5634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5636 reference "sec:Nesting"
5643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5645 \begin_inset Index idx
5648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5669 paragraph environment.
5670 It has the following properties:
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The items can have any length.
5691 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5692 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5699 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 environment inside another
5708 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5721 \begin_layout Itemize
5723 \begin_inset space ~
5727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5729 reference "sec:Nesting"
5733 for a full explanation of nesting.
5737 \begin_layout Standard
5738 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5747 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5752 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 The label for the first level
5760 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5764 \begin_layout Itemize
5765 The label for the second level is a dash.
5769 \begin_layout Itemize
5770 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5774 \begin_layout Itemize
5775 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5779 \begin_layout Itemize
5780 Back out to the third level.
5784 \begin_layout Itemize
5785 Back to the second level.
5789 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 Back to the outermost level.
5793 \begin_layout Standard
5794 These are the default labels for an
5799 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5804 dialog in the submenu
5809 \begin_inset Index idx
5812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5818 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5824 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5826 \begin_inset space ~
5830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5832 reference "sec:Nesting"
5839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5841 \begin_inset Index idx
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5853 name "sec:Enumerate"
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5865 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5866 It has these properties:
5869 \begin_layout Enumerate
5870 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5874 \begin_layout Enumerate
5875 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5889 environment resets the counter to one.
5892 \begin_layout Enumerate
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5907 Items can have any length.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5914 \begin_layout Enumerate
5915 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5918 \begin_layout Enumerate
5919 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5932 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5934 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5935 labels the four different levels in an
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 The first level of an
5947 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5951 \begin_layout Enumerate
5952 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5957 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5961 \begin_layout Enumerate
5962 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5965 \begin_layout Enumerate
5966 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5971 \begin_layout Enumerate
5972 Back to the third level
5976 \begin_layout Enumerate
5977 Back to the second level.
5981 \begin_layout Enumerate
5982 Back to the outermost level.
5985 \begin_layout Standard
5986 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5990 environment, see section
5991 \begin_inset space ~
5995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5997 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6002 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6006 \begin_layout Standard
6007 There is more to nesting
6011 environments than we've stated here.
6012 You should read section
6013 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6019 reference "sec:Nesting"
6023 to learn more about nesting.
6026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6028 \begin_inset Index idx
6031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6040 \begin_layout Standard
6041 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6045 list has no fixed label.
6046 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6055 of the first line as the label.
6059 \begin_layout Description
6060 Example: This is an example of the
6067 \begin_layout Standard
6069 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6073 \begin_layout Standard
6075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6082 it is meant that the first usage of the
6086 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6088 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6096 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6104 \begin_inset space ~
6110 \begin_inset space ~
6114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6116 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6120 for more information.) Here is an example:
6123 \begin_layout Description
6125 \begin_inset space ~
6128 Example: This one shows how to use a
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6143 \begin_layout Description
6144 Usage: You should use the
6148 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6149 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6151 It's not a good idea to use a
6155 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6156 You're better off using
6168 paragraphs into them.
6171 \begin_layout Description
6172 Nesting: You can nest
6176 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6180 \begin_layout Standard
6181 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6182 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6183 them from the first line.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6205 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6206 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6210 \begin_layout Standard
6219 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6221 Here are its properties:
6224 \begin_layout Labeling
6225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6227 \begin_inset space ~
6230 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6239 of each line as the item label.
6244 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6245 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6246 space as described above.
6249 \begin_layout Labeling
6250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6251 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6252 uses different margins for the item label and the
6253 body of the item text.
6254 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6255 label width plus a little extra space.
6259 \begin_layout Labeling
6260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6265 width \SpecialChar LyX
6266 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6267 If the label width is larger, the label
6268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6275 into the first line.
6276 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6277 margin of the rest of the item text.
6280 \begin_layout Labeling
6281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6283 \begin_inset space ~
6286 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6291 environment has the same left margin.
6292 \begin_inset Newline newline
6295 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6305 dialog (toolbar button
6308 arg "layout-paragraph"
6315 \begin_inset space ~
6320 determines the default label width.
6321 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6330 multiple times instead.
6331 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6341 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6344 \begin_inset space ~
6349 every time you alter a label in a
6354 \begin_inset Newline newline
6357 The predefined default width is the length of
6358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6366 \begin_inset space ~
6372 \begin_layout Standard
6377 list the same way as the
6381 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6387 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6396 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6397 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6399 \begin_inset space ~
6403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6405 reference "sec:Nesting"
6409 to learn about nesting.
6412 \begin_layout Standard
6413 There is yet another feature of the
6417 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6418 left-justifies the item labels by
6420 You can use additional
6424 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6425 justifies the item label.
6430 are documented in section
6431 \begin_inset space ~
6435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6437 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6442 Here are some examples:
6445 \begin_layout Labeling
6446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6447 Left The default for
6454 \begin_layout Labeling
6455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6463 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6466 \begin_layout Labeling
6467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6468 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6479 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6482 \begin_layout Subsection
6484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6486 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6491 \begin_inset Index idx
6494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6503 \begin_layout Standard
6504 The features described in this section require that the module
6506 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6508 is loaded in the document settings.
6509 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6515 \begin_inset Index idx
6518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6520 -packages ! enumitem
6528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6529 Custom Enumerate Lists
6530 \begin_inset Index idx
6533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6534 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6550 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6551 There you add the command
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6562 \begin_layout Standard
6574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6575 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6576 Code, look at section
6577 \begin_inset space ~
6581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6583 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6596 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6603 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6604 For capital Roman numerals replace
6616 in the command above.
6617 For Arabic numerals use
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6657 You can only number 26
6658 \begin_inset space ~
6661 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6670 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6671 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6674 \begin_layout Standard
6675 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6678 \begin_layout Enumerate
6679 \begin_inset Argument 1
6682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Enumerate
6709 \begin_inset Argument 1
6712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 \begin_layout Enumerate
6741 \begin_inset Argument 1
6744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Enumerate
6769 \begin_inset Argument 1
6772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Standard
6799 For this list these commands were used:
6802 \begin_layout Standard
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6829 \begin_inset Newline newline
6839 \begin_layout Standard
6846 makes the label emphasized and
6855 \begin_layout Standard
6856 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6864 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6865 lists until you change the definition.
6873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6875 \begin_inset Index idx
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6879 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6888 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6891 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_inset Argument 1
6895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 \begin_inset Note Note
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 goes back to default numbering
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6934 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6938 \begin_layout Standard
6939 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6944 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6945 to indicate that it is a resumed
6946 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6947 , but in the output.
6950 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6969 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6971 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6972 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6973 of a normal enumeration.
6974 There, insert the command
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6983 \begin_layout Standard
6988 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6992 \begin_layout Enumerate
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7004 \begin_layout Enumerate
7005 \begin_inset Argument 1
7008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 This enumeration starts at 4
7027 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7029 \begin_inset Index idx
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 \begin_layout Standard
7042 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7044 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7047 \begin_layout Itemize
7051 \begin_layout Itemize
7052 with standard spacing
7055 \begin_layout Standard
7056 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7058 Add there the command
7062 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7065 \begin_layout Itemize
7066 \begin_inset Argument 1
7069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7088 \begin_layout Itemize
7092 \begin_layout Itemize
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7104 \begin_inset Index idx
7107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7109 -packages ! enumitem
7115 For more information see its documentation,
7116 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7126 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7128 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7129 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7133 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7136 \begin_layout Enumerate
7137 \begin_inset Argument 1
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7148 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7161 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 with negative indentation
7165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7166 Further Customization
7167 \begin_inset Index idx
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 Lists ! Customization
7179 \begin_layout Standard
7180 You can also change the style of description lists.
7184 \begin_layout Standard
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 changes the description label font, the command
7194 \begin_layout Standard
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 sets the list style.
7204 \begin_layout Standard
7205 An example where the command
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7213 itshape, style=nextline
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7220 \begin_layout Description
7222 \begin_inset space ~
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7237 itshape, style=nextline
7247 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7248 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7252 \begin_layout Description
7254 \begin_inset space ~
7257 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7258 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7259 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7263 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7269 \begin_inset Index idx
7272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 -packages ! enumitem
7280 For more information see its documentation
7281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7290 \begin_layout Subsection
7292 \begin_inset Index idx
7295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7306 \begin_inset space ~
7309 Address: An Overview
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7313 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7314 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7322 \begin_inset space ~
7328 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7329 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7330 gags on the document.
7331 In contrast, you can use the
7338 \begin_inset space ~
7343 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7344 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7349 Of course, you're not limited to using
7356 \begin_inset space ~
7365 \begin_inset space ~
7370 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7371 some European academic papers.
7374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7378 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7385 \begin_layout Standard
7390 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7391 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7395 \begin_inset space ~
7400 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7401 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7402 Here's an example of each:
7405 \begin_layout Right Address
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7411 \begin_inset Newline newline
7415 \begin_inset Newline newline
7418 When is it? What is today?
7421 \begin_layout Standard
7425 \begin_inset space ~
7431 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7433 the largest block of text on a single line.
7434 Here's an example of the
7441 \begin_layout Address
7443 \begin_inset Newline newline
7446 Where do I send this
7447 \begin_inset Newline newline
7450 Your post office and country
7453 \begin_layout Standard
7454 As you can see, both
7461 \begin_inset space ~
7466 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7471 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7472 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7478 This makes sense, since
7486 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7487 Thus, you have to use
7494 arg "newline-insert newline"
7499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7500 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7502 \begin_inset space ~
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7511 ) to start a new line in an
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_layout Subsection
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7531 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7532 or list of references.
7534 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7539 \begin_inset Index idx
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7556 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7557 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7558 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7559 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7573 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7574 The book document classes ignores the
7578 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7582 in a letter document class.
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7590 environment does several things for you.
7591 First, it puts the centered label
7592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7600 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7602 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7603 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7604 the subsequent text.
7605 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7607 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7611 \begin_layout Standard
7612 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7616 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7617 The new paragraph will still be in the
7622 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7623 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7626 \begin_layout Standard
7627 \begin_inset Float figure
7632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7634 \begin_inset Graphics
7635 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7648 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 We would love to demonstrate the
7674 environment, but since this document is in the
7675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7682 class, we can't do this.
7683 We inserted it therefore as figure
7684 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7690 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7695 If you have never heard of an
7696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7703 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7708 \begin_inset Index idx
7711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7720 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7727 \begin_layout Standard
7732 environment is used to list references.
7733 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7734 only use it at the end of the document.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 When you first open a
7751 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7752 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7768 depending on the document class.
7769 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7770 Each paragraph of the
7774 environment is a bibliography entry.
7779 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7780 Each new paragraph is still in the
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7789 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7791 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7793 handling, have a look at section
7794 \begin_inset space ~
7798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7807 \begin_layout Subsection
7808 Special Environments
7811 \begin_layout Standard
7813 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7814 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7822 \begin_inset Index idx
7825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7835 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7848 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7850 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7855 key as a fixed whitespace.
7859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7872 \begin_inset space ~
7877 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7891 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7894 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7897 arg "newline-insert newline"
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 So, when you finish using the
7920 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7921 Also, you can nest the
7926 environment inside of others.
7929 \begin_layout Standard
7930 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
7937 arg "newline-insert newline"
7940 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7945 \begin_inset space \space{}
7955 arg "newline-insert newline"
7961 \begin_layout Itemize
7965 arg "newline-insert newline"
7975 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7981 \begin_layout Itemize
7982 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7983 You must put at least one
7987 in any line you want blank.
7988 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7992 \begin_layout Itemize
7993 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7997 since that will insert
8002 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8005 arg "self-insert \""
8011 \begin_layout Standard
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8031 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8032 printf("Hello World!
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8045 \begin_layout Standard
8046 This is just the standard
8047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8058 \begin_layout Standard
8064 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8066 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8067 as if you used a typewriter.
8068 \begin_inset Index idx
8071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8072 Paragraph environments|)
8077 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8080 Program Code Listings
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8097 \begin_inset Index idx
8100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8109 \begin_layout Standard
8114 environment is similar to the
8119 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8120 computer console text.
8125 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8139 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8140 you can have empty lines.
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 have a certain language and a text style
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8159 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8160 and \SpecialChar TeX
8164 \begin_layout Standard
8165 Because of these properties
8169 works like a typewriter.
8173 \begin_layout Verbatim
8178 \begin_layout Verbatim
8182 The following 2 lines are empty:
8185 \begin_layout Verbatim
8189 \begin_layout Verbatim
8193 \begin_layout Verbatim
8195 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8200 \begin_layout Section
8201 Nesting Environments
8202 \begin_inset Index idx
8205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8206 Nesting ! Environments
8212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8221 \begin_layout Subsection
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8227 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8229 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8231 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8233 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8245 \begin_layout Enumerate
8249 \begin_layout Enumerate
8254 \begin_layout Enumerate
8258 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Standard
8268 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8269 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8273 \begin_inset space ~
8277 \begin_inset space ~
8285 \begin_inset space ~
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8294 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8296 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8299 arg "depth-increment"
8305 arg "depth-decrement"
8319 arg "depth-increment"
8325 arg "depth-decrement"
8329 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8330 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8334 \begin_layout Standard
8335 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8336 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8337 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8338 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8339 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8342 \begin_layout Standard
8343 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8345 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8347 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8350 \begin_layout Subsection
8351 What You Can and Can't Nest
8354 \begin_layout Standard
8355 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8356 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8361 than a simple yes or no.
8362 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 Completely unnestable
8369 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8374 \begin_layout Itemize
8375 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8380 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8381 environments have them:
8384 \begin_layout Description
8385 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8386 Can't nest into them.
8390 \begin_layout Itemize
8396 \begin_layout Itemize
8402 \begin_layout Itemize
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Description
8423 \begin_inset space ~
8426 Nestable You can nest them.
8427 You can nest other things into them.
8431 \begin_layout Itemize
8437 \begin_layout Itemize
8443 \begin_layout Itemize
8449 \begin_layout Itemize
8455 \begin_layout Itemize
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8480 \begin_layout Itemize
8487 \begin_layout Description
8488 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8489 You can't nest anything into them.
8493 \begin_layout Itemize
8499 \begin_layout Itemize
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_inset space ~
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Standard
8589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8597 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8610 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8611 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8612 nested section headings violate this.
8620 \begin_layout Subsection
8621 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8622 \begin_inset Index idx
8625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8626 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8634 \begin_layout Standard
8635 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8636 affected by nesting anyhow.
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Standard
8654 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8662 Figures and tables in
8666 are not affected by this.
8671 Have a look at section
8672 \begin_inset space ~
8676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8678 reference "sec:Floats"
8682 for more information about
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8691 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8692 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8696 \begin_layout Standard
8697 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8705 of its own, it behaves just like a
8706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8713 paragraph environment.
8714 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8718 \begin_layout Standard
8719 Here's an example with a table:
8722 \begin_layout Enumerate
8727 \begin_layout Enumerate
8728 This is (a) and it's nested.
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8739 \begin_layout Standard
8741 \begin_inset Tabular
8742 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8743 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8744 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8745 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8830 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8837 \begin_layout Enumerate
8839 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Standard
8848 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8857 This is (a) and it's nested.
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8862 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8868 \begin_layout Standard
8870 \begin_inset Tabular
8871 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8872 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8874 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 \begin_layout Standard
8959 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8965 \begin_layout Enumerate
8972 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8975 \begin_layout Enumerate
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8984 \begin_layout Standard
8985 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8988 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8991 \begin_layout Enumerate
8996 \begin_layout Enumerate
8997 This is (a) and it's nested.
9000 \begin_layout Standard
9001 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9007 \begin_layout Standard
9009 \begin_inset Tabular
9010 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9011 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9012 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9013 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9098 \begin_layout Standard
9099 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9105 \begin_layout Enumerate
9107 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9114 \begin_layout Enumerate
9118 \begin_layout Standard
9119 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9125 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9126 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9130 \begin_layout Subsection
9131 Usage and General Features
9134 \begin_layout Standard
9135 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9136 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9145 is the innermost possible depth.
9146 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9149 \begin_layout Enumerate
9150 level #1 – outermost
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Itemize
9174 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9185 both of them in the example.
9186 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9196 For example, if we tried to nest another
9201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9208 , we would get errors.
9211 \begin_layout Subsection
9213 \begin_inset Index idx
9216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 \begin_layout Standard
9226 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9227 We have several examples of nested environments.
9228 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9233 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9236 \begin_layout Labeling
9237 \labelwidthstring MMM
9238 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9247 \begin_layout Labeling
9248 \labelwidthstring MMM
9249 #2-a This is level #2.
9250 We created it by using
9253 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9259 arg "depth-increment"
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #3-a This is level #3.
9269 This time, we just enter
9276 arg "depth-increment"
9280 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9284 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9302 environment, nested inside of
9303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9311 So, it's at level #4.
9312 We did this by entering
9315 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9321 arg "depth-increment"
9324 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9329 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9345 \begin_layout Standard
9350 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9353 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9359 \begin_layout Labeling
9360 \labelwidthstring MMM
9361 #4-a This is level #4.
9365 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9368 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9373 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9377 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9382 keep nesting things inside
9383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9394 \begin_layout Labeling
9395 \labelwidthstring MMM
9396 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9401 \begin_layout Labeling
9402 \labelwidthstring MMM
9403 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9404 and this is level #6.
9405 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9409 \begin_layout Labeling
9410 \labelwidthstring MMM
9411 #5-b Back to level #5.
9415 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9421 arg "depth-decrement"
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9433 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9439 arg "depth-decrement"
9442 , we're back at level #4.
9446 \begin_layout Labeling
9447 \labelwidthstring MMM
9448 #3-b Back to level #3.
9449 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9453 \begin_layout Labeling
9454 \labelwidthstring MMM
9455 #2-b Back to level #2.
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9463 After this sentence, we will enter
9467 and change the paragraph environment back to
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9475 We could have also used the
9491 environment in place of the
9496 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9500 Example 2: Inheritance
9503 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9504 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9507 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9516 arg "depth-increment"
9520 \begin_inset Newline newline
9523 which, we will change to the
9531 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 environment, at level #2.
9539 \begin_layout Enumerate
9540 Notice how the nested
9544 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9548 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9552 \begin_layout Standard
9553 We ended this example by entering
9558 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9562 and reset the nesting depth by using
9565 arg "depth-decrement"
9571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9572 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9581 \begin_inset Argument 1
9584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9585 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9593 \begin_layout Enumerate
9594 This is level #1, in an
9598 paragraph environment.
9599 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9603 \begin_layout Enumerate
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-increment"
9618 Now, what happens if we nest an
9622 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9623 label be? An asterisk?
9627 \begin_layout Itemize
9637 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9638 So, its label is a bullet.
9639 (We got here by using
9642 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9648 arg "depth-increment"
9651 , then changing the environment to
9659 \begin_layout Itemize
9660 Here's level #4, produced using
9663 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9669 arg "depth-increment"
9673 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9678 \begin_layout Enumerate
9681 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9686 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9690 , because we are in the
9698 environment (that is, it is an
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9718 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9719 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9723 \begin_layout Enumerate
9724 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9727 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9730 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9737 arg "depth-decrement"
9740 to decrease the depth after the next
9743 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9750 \begin_layout Enumerate
9752 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9759 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9760 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9764 \begin_layout Enumerate
9765 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9774 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9779 reset the counter for the label.
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9793 arg "depth-decrement"
9796 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9797 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9798 into the twofold-nested
9806 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 The same thing happens if we do another
9810 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9816 arg "depth-decrement"
9819 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9823 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9828 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9843 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9850 The same rule applies for the
9854 environment, as well.
9857 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9858 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9861 \begin_layout Enumerate
9862 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9863 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9864 the same detail with how we did it.
9873 \begin_layout Standard
9881 arg "depth-increment"
9888 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9889 the example in parentheses someplace.
9890 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9891 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9892 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9896 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9906 Now we will add verse.
9907 \begin_inset Newline newline
9910 It will get much worse.
9911 \begin_inset Newline newline
9921 arg "depth-increment"
9932 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9933 \begin_inset Newline newline
9936 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9937 \begin_inset Newline newline
9943 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 \begin_layout Standard
9957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9963 \begin_layout Standard
9965 \begin_inset Tabular
9966 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9967 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9969 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10054 \begin_layout Verse
10058 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10068 arg "depth-increment"
10074 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10080 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-decrement"
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10100 : level #1) This is another item.
10101 Note that selecting a
10105 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10106 3 times to put the table inside the
10114 \begin_layout Quotation
10115 We're now ending the
10119 list and changing to
10124 We're still at level #1.
10125 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10126 The next set of paragraphs is a
10127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10134 We will nest both the
10141 \begin_inset space ~
10146 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10150 for the letter body.
10154 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10157 to preserve the depth.
10158 Remember that you need to use
10161 arg "newline-insert newline"
10164 to create multiple lines inside the
10171 \begin_inset space ~
10181 \begin_layout Right Address
10183 \begin_inset Newline newline
10186 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10187 \begin_inset Newline newline
10193 \begin_layout Address
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10201 \begin_layout Quotation
10202 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10206 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10207 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10208 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10209 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10210 as soon as possible.
10211 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10214 \begin_layout Quotation
10215 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10216 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10217 with your order, along with payment.
10220 \begin_layout Quotation
10221 We thank you again for your patience.
10224 \begin_layout Address
10226 \begin_inset Newline newline
10233 \begin_layout Quotation
10234 That ends that example!
10237 \begin_layout Standard
10238 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10239 gives you a lot of power with just
10241 We could have easily nested an
10262 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10265 \begin_layout Subsection
10267 \begin_inset Index idx
10270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10271 Nesting ! Separation
10277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10279 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10286 \begin_layout Standard
10287 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10289 For example you need two different enumerations:
10292 \begin_layout Enumerate
10297 \begin_layout Enumerate
10302 \begin_layout Enumerate
10306 \begin_layout Standard
10307 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10313 \begin_layout Itemize
10319 \begin_layout Standard
10320 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10334 \begin_layout Enumerate
10338 \begin_layout Standard
10339 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10340 list item and use the menu
10342 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10343 Start New Environment
10346 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10348 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10351 arg "paragraph-break"
10355 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10356 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10357 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10358 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10361 \begin_layout Standard
10362 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10365 arg "paragraph-break"
10368 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10371 \begin_layout Section
10372 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10373 \begin_inset Index idx
10376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10387 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10389 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10390 be broken at the end of a line.
10391 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10395 \begin_layout Subsection
10397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10399 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10404 \begin_inset Index idx
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10418 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10419 ) not to break the line at
10421 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10424 \begin_layout Quote
10425 Further documentation is given in section
10426 \begin_inset Newline newline
10430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10432 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10465 A protected space is set with
10467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10468 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10470 \begin_inset space ~
10478 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10484 \begin_layout Subsection
10486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10488 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10493 \begin_inset Index idx
10496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10497 Spacing ! Horizontal
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10509 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10513 The length units are listed in Appendix
10514 \begin_inset space ~
10518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10520 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10531 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10536 \begin_inset Index idx
10539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10540 Spaces ! Inter-word
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10550 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10551 at the ends of sentences.
10552 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10553 automatically takes care about this.
10554 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10555 followed by a period; see section
10556 \begin_inset space ~
10560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10562 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10567 To insert a normal space, select
10569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10570 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10572 \begin_inset space ~
10580 arg "space-insert normal"
10586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10590 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10595 \begin_inset Index idx
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10607 \begin_layout Standard
10609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10616 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10626 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10627 inside abbreviations:
10630 \begin_layout Quote
10632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10636 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 or between values and units.
10641 Compare for example this:
10642 \begin_inset Newline newline
10646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10650 \begin_inset Newline newline
10653 10 kg (normal space
10656 \begin_layout Standard
10657 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10660 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10662 \begin_inset space ~
10670 arg "space-insert thin"
10676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 You can also insert the following space types:
10684 \begin_layout Description
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10690 \begin_inset space ~
10693 space A line with a
10694 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10698 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10702 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10705 negative thin space between the arrows.
10708 \begin_layout Description
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10717 space A line with a
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10722 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10726 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10729 negative medium space between the arrows.
10732 \begin_layout Description
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10741 space A line with a
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10746 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10750 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10753 negative thick space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Description
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10770 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10785 em) space between the arrows.
10788 \begin_layout Description
10790 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10798 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10802 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10806 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10810 \begin_inset space ~
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 em) space between the arrows.
10820 \begin_layout Description
10822 \begin_inset space ~
10826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10830 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10834 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10838 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10842 \begin_inset space ~
10846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 em) space between the arrows.
10852 \begin_layout Description
10854 \begin_inset space ~
10858 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10862 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10867 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10874 cm space between the arrows.
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10879 \begin_inset space ~
10883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10885 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10889 lists the different space sizes.
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10893 \begin_inset Float table
10898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10899 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10904 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10908 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10918 \begin_inset Tabular
10919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11038 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11197 \begin_inset Index idx
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_layout Standard
11210 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11211 feature for adding extra space
11212 in a uniform fashion.
11213 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11214 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11215 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11216 equally between themselves.
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11220 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11223 \begin_layout Quote
11225 This is on the left side
11226 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11229 This is on the right
11232 \begin_layout Quote
11235 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11239 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11245 \begin_layout Quote
11248 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11256 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11262 \begin_layout Standard
11263 That was an example in the
11269 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11273 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11277 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11280 is one in a standard paragraph.
11281 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11285 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11288 \begin_layout Standard
11289 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11292 \begin_inset space ~
11297 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11300 \begin_layout Standard
11302 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11306 \begin_inset space ~
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11314 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11318 \begin_inset space ~
11324 \begin_layout Standard
11326 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11330 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11338 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11348 \begin_layout Standard
11350 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11354 \begin_inset space ~
11360 \begin_layout Standard
11362 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11373 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11385 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11387 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11388 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11392 option in the space dialog.
11400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11404 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11409 \begin_inset Index idx
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11423 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11426 \begin_layout Standard
11427 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11430 What is correct English?:
11431 \begin_inset Newline newline
11435 \begin_inset Newline newline
11439 \begin_inset space ~
11442 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11443 \begin_inset Newline newline
11447 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11458 \begin_inset Newline newline
11462 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11473 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11481 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11498 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11501 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11505 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11511 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11522 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11531 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11532 That is why it is named
11533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11541 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11542 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11546 \begin_layout Subsection
11548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11550 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11555 \begin_inset Index idx
11558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11568 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11571 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11573 \begin_inset space ~
11579 There you find the following sizes:
11582 \begin_layout Standard
11595 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11596 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11601 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11606 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11616 Document ! Settings
11621 for the paragraph separation.
11622 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11633 \begin_layout Standard
11639 \begin_inset Index idx
11642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11649 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11654 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11655 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11664 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11673 s are described in section
11674 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11680 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11689 If there are several
11693 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11694 You can therefore use
11698 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11701 \begin_layout Standard
11706 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11713 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11721 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11731 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11732 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 Paragraph Alignment
11746 \begin_inset Index idx
11749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 Paragraph ! Alignment
11758 \begin_layout Standard
11759 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11764 dialog (toolbar button
11767 arg "layout-paragraph"
11771 There are five possibilities:
11774 \begin_layout Itemize
11782 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11788 \begin_layout Itemize
11796 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11802 \begin_layout Itemize
11810 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11816 \begin_layout Itemize
11824 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11830 \begin_layout Itemize
11838 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11844 \begin_layout Standard
11845 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11846 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11847 the left and right margins.
11848 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11851 \begin_layout Standard
11853 This paragraph is right aligned,
11856 \begin_layout Standard
11858 this one is centered,
11861 \begin_layout Standard
11863 this one is left aligned.
11866 \begin_layout Subsection
11868 \begin_inset Index idx
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 Page breaks ! Forced
11878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11880 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11887 \begin_layout Standard
11888 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11889 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11890 force a page break where you want one.
11891 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11892 is good at page breaking.
11893 Only if you use a lot of
11897 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11898 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11902 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11903 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11907 have to change the page breaking.
11910 \begin_layout Standard
11911 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11913 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11916 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11918 \begin_inset space ~
11924 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11927 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11929 \begin_inset space ~
11934 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11936 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11937 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11940 \begin_layout Standard
11941 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11942 at the top of a page.
11943 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11945 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11946 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11947 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11951 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11955 to learn more about
11962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11966 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11971 \begin_inset Index idx
11974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11975 Page breaks ! Clear
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11984 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11985 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11986 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11987 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11988 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11991 \begin_layout Standard
11992 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11995 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11997 \begin_inset space ~
12003 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12006 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12008 \begin_inset space ~
12012 \begin_inset space ~
12017 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12018 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12021 \begin_layout Subsection
12023 \begin_inset Index idx
12026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12035 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12043 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12045 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12048 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12050 \begin_inset space ~
12054 \begin_inset space ~
12062 arg "newline-insert newline"
12066 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12069 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12071 \begin_inset space ~
12075 \begin_inset space ~
12083 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12086 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12088 This is useful to avoid
12089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12096 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12103 very good at line breaking.
12104 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12105 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12112 reference "sec:Quote"
12117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12119 reference "sec:Verse"
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12133 \begin_layout Subsection
12135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12137 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12142 \begin_inset Index idx
12145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12154 \begin_layout Standard
12156 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12167 \begin_layout Standard
12171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12174 \begin_inset space ~
12179 you can insert horizontal lines.
12180 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12181 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12182 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12187 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12198 \begin_layout Section
12199 Characters and Symbols
12202 \begin_layout Standard
12203 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12204 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12205 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12213 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12217 for information on how this is done.
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12221 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12226 dialog via the menu
12228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12229 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_layout Standard
12236 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12244 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12245 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12247 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12255 \begin_layout Section
12256 Fonts and Text Styles
12257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12259 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12266 \begin_layout Subsection
12268 \begin_inset Index idx
12271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12281 There are two types of fonts:
12284 \begin_layout Description
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12290 \begin_inset Index idx
12293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12299 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12304 characters) in the font.
12305 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12306 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12307 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12308 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12309 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12310 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12311 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12312 \begin_inset Newline newline
12315 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12316 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12317 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12318 sizes than at small ones.
12319 \begin_inset Newline newline
12333 \begin_inset space ~
12341 \begin_layout Description
12343 \begin_inset space ~
12347 \begin_inset Index idx
12350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12356 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12357 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12358 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12359 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12360 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12361 image manipulation program.
12362 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12363 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12367 pixels high up to 34
12368 \begin_inset space ~
12371 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12372 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12373 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12375 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12376 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12377 \begin_inset Newline newline
12380 Bitmap fonts are named
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12388 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12391 \begin_layout Standard
12392 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12393 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12394 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12395 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12396 use scalable fonts.
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12405 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12406 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12407 font to emphasize text, you use an
12408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12416 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12418 In \SpecialChar LyX
12419 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12423 \begin_layout Subsection
12426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12428 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12435 \begin_layout Standard
12436 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12437 used its own fonts.
12438 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12439 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12442 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12443 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12444 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12445 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12446 to a word processor.
12447 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12448 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12449 files are very portable across
12450 different machines.
12451 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 has increased a lot
12453 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12456 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12458 \begin_inset space ~
12462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12464 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12469 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12470 code in the document
12471 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12475 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12476 engines that are also able directly
12477 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12479 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12481 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12483 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12484 that is installed on your system.
12485 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12488 \begin_layout Standard
12489 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12498 es; so you might have to experiment.
12506 \begin_layout Standard
12507 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12516 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12517 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12518 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12519 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12528 \begin_layout Subsection
12529 Document Font and Font size
12530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12532 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12537 \begin_inset Index idx
12540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 \begin_inset Index idx
12550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12559 \begin_layout Standard
12560 You can set the document fonts in the
12562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12566 \begin_inset Index idx
12569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12570 Document ! Settings
12580 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12581 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12593 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12598 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12606 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12607 This requires that you use
12619 as the output format, i.
12620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12624 \begin_inset space \space{}
12627 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12628 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12629 installed (see section
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12641 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12643 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12644 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12646 \begin_inset space ~
12649 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12650 cannot determine the family.
12651 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12652 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12655 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12658 \begin_layout Standard
12659 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12660 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12665 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12672 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12680 \begin_inset space ~
12686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12699 European Computer Modern
12702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12709 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12721 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12722 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12727 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12730 \begin_inset space ~
12735 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12741 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12742 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12745 \begin_layout Itemize
12749 \begin_inset space ~
12754 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12767 \begin_inset space ~
12772 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12773 community in order to replace
12777 as the default font.
12778 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12779 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12782 \begin_inset space ~
12795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12796 One difference is improved kerning.
12804 \begin_layout Itemize
12808 \begin_inset space ~
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12817 fonts in (the rare) case that
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12825 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12840 Virtual means that it
12841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12852 -glyphs from other fonts.
12853 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12881 \begin_inset Index idx
12884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12886 -packages ! aeguill
12891 with the document preamble line
12892 \begin_inset Newline newline
12899 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12900 \begin_inset Newline newline
12905 will fix the guillemet problem.
12910 and that accented characters are not
12914 glyph, but built of
12918 characters, the accent and the letter.
12919 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12925 If you search for example for the French word
12926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12933 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12942 and not for the glyph
12943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12958 If you do not like the look of
12966 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12987 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12991 serif and typewriter fonts,
12995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12996 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13012 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13017 \begin_inset space \space{}
13025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13029 \begin_inset space \space{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13043 \begin_inset space ~
13053 but you can also select your own.
13054 \begin_inset Newline newline
13057 The differences between roman,
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13069 fonts are explained in section
13070 \begin_inset space ~
13074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13076 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13081 \begin_inset Newline newline
13087 \begin_inset space ~
13092 was originally designed for newspapers.
13093 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13094 into the small newspaper columns.
13098 \begin_inset space ~
13103 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13106 \begin_layout Standard
13107 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13120 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13125 depends on the class you are using.
13126 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13129 \begin_layout Standard
13130 Note that the font size is the
13135 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13136 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13137 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13138 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13147 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13154 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13170 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13175 serif or typewriter.
13180 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13190 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13198 LaTeX font encoding
13200 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13201 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13207 \begin_inset Index idx
13210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13212 -packages ! fontenc
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13224 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13229 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13230 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13237 \begin_layout Standard
13238 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13240 Use Old Style Figures
13244 Use True Small Caps
13247 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13250 Use Old Style Figures
13252 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13254 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13262 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13266 Use True Small Caps
13268 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13269 of scaled capitals.
13270 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13271 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13274 \begin_layout Standard
13279 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13280 a font to display the script characters.
13284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13285 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13291 \begin_inset Index idx
13294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13301 So this has no effect for the document language
13315 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13327 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13332 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13333 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13335 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13337 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13340 dialog, see section
13341 \begin_inset space ~
13345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13347 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13359 \begin_layout Subsection
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13364 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13365 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13367 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13368 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13369 choose a math font in the dialog
13371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13375 \begin_inset Index idx
13378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13379 Document ! Settings
13385 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13386 automatically selects a math font.
13387 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13408 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13409 document font is available.
13412 \begin_layout Standard
13413 Note that the math font will not be used for
13417 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13423 or by the insertion of the command
13430 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13435 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13436 while the math characters do not.
13438 \begin_inset space ~
13441 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13444 \begin_inset space ~
13452 \begin_inset space ~
13457 in the document font settings.
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13461 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13462 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13463 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13464 font (in most cases
13465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13471 \begin_inset space ~
13477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13480 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13481 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13501 \begin_layout Subsection
13502 Using Different Character Styles
13503 \begin_inset Index idx
13506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13513 \begin_inset Index idx
13516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13527 automatically changes the character style for certain
13528 paragraph environments.
13530 supports two character styles,
13539 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13543 \begin_layout Standard
13548 style, do one of the following:
13551 \begin_layout Itemize
13552 click on the toolbar button
13561 \begin_layout Itemize
13562 use the key binding
13571 \begin_layout Standard
13572 These commands are all toggles.
13577 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13580 \begin_layout Standard
13581 One typically uses the
13585 style for proper names.
13587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13594 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13603 A more widely used character style is the
13608 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13615 \begin_layout Itemize
13616 clicking on the toolbar button
13625 \begin_layout Itemize
13626 using the keybindings
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13640 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13642 use a different font.
13645 \begin_layout Standard
13646 We've been using the
13650 style all over the place in this document.
13651 Here's one more example:
13654 \begin_layout Quotation
13657 Do not overuse character styles!
13660 \begin_layout Standard
13661 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13662 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13663 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13664 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13668 \begin_layout Standard
13669 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13677 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13679 \begin_inset space ~
13682 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13688 arg "dialog-show character"
13694 \begin_layout Subsection
13695 Fine-Tuning with the
13700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13702 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13707 \begin_inset Index idx
13710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13719 \begin_layout Standard
13720 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13722 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13723 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13724 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13725 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13726 from ordinary dialog.
13729 \begin_layout Standard
13730 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13731 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13732 \begin_inset Newline newline
13735 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13736 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13740 To use custom character styles, open the
13742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13747 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13750 dialog or press the toolbar button
13753 arg "dialog-show character"
13757 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13758 font property that you can choose.
13759 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13767 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13772 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13773 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13774 environments all at once.
13777 \begin_layout Standard
13778 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13793 \begin_layout Labeling
13794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13808 The possible options are:
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13818 This is the Roman font family.
13819 Normally a serif font.
13820 It's also the default family.
13830 \begin_layout Labeling
13831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13835 \begin_inset space ~
13842 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13854 \begin_layout Labeling
13855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13862 This is the Typewriter font family.
13868 arg "font-typewriter"
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13883 This corresponds to the print weight.
13888 \begin_layout Labeling
13889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13894 This is the Medium font series.
13895 It's also the default series.
13898 \begin_layout Labeling
13899 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13906 This is the Bold font series.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13925 As the name implies.
13930 \begin_layout Labeling
13931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13936 This is the Upright font shape.
13937 It's also the default shape.
13940 \begin_layout Labeling
13941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 s the Italic font shape
13961 \begin_layout Labeling
13962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 This is the Slanted font shape
13971 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13972 , this is different from italic).
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13987 This is the Small caps font shape
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 Alters the text color.
14001 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14005 \begin_inset space ~
14010 , which means that the document default color set in
14012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14013 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14019 \begin_inset space ~
14024 is used, you can choose between
14057 \begin_inset Index idx
14060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14069 \begin_layout Labeling
14070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14075 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14076 the language of the document.
14077 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14078 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14080 \begin_inset Newline newline
14083 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14085 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14086 When using the spell checking (see section
14087 \begin_inset space ~
14091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14093 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14097 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14100 \begin_layout Labeling
14101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14106 Alters the size of the font.
14107 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14108 proportional to the document font size.
14109 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14110 the details, but a general description of what
14116 \begin_layout Labeling
14117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14138 arg "font-size tiny"
14144 \begin_layout Labeling
14145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14166 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14172 \begin_layout Labeling
14173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14194 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14200 \begin_layout Labeling
14201 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14222 arg "font-size small"
14228 \begin_layout Labeling
14229 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 It's also the default size.
14247 arg "font-size normal"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size large"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size larger"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14331 arg "font-size largest"
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14359 arg "font-size huge"
14365 \begin_layout Labeling
14366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14387 arg "font-size giant"
14393 \begin_layout Labeling
14394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size increase"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14451 arg "font-size decrease"
14458 \begin_layout Standard
14463 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14464 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14466 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14467 — use those instead.
14468 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14471 \begin_layout Labeling
14472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14477 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14482 \begin_layout Labeling
14483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14490 This is text with emphasize on
14493 This might seem like the same as
14497 , but it is actually a bit different.
14503 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14505 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14508 \begin_layout Labeling
14509 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14516 This is text with Underbar on.
14522 arg "font-underline"
14528 \begin_inset Newline newline
14533 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14534 when you could not change fonts.
14535 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14536 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14537 because some people
14541 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14549 \begin_inset space ~
14556 This is text with Double underbar on.
14562 arg "font-underunderline"
14566 \begin_inset Newline newline
14569 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14570 about double underbar.
14573 \begin_layout Labeling
14574 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14578 \begin_inset space ~
14585 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14591 arg "font-underwave"
14595 \begin_inset Newline newline
14598 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14599 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14602 \begin_layout Labeling
14603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14610 This is text with Strikeout on.
14616 arg "font-strikeout"
14620 \begin_inset Newline newline
14623 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14624 changed in the meantime.
14627 \begin_layout Labeling
14628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14635 This is text with Noun on.
14642 , this is a logical attribute.
14643 Normally it's equivalent to
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14656 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14657 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14659 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14661 \begin_inset space ~
14664 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14670 arg "dialog-show character"
14673 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14674 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14677 arg "textstyle-apply"
14681 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14685 \begin_layout Standard
14686 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14693 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14694 (suppose you just set the shape to
14695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14713 \begin_inset space ~
14725 \begin_layout Standard
14726 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14734 \begin_inset space ~
14746 \begin_layout Itemize
14752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14759 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14777 \begin_inset Newline newline
14781 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14795 \begin_inset Note Note
14798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14799 For more on phantoms see section
14800 \begin_inset space ~
14804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14806 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14816 \begin_inset Newline newline
14822 \begin_layout Itemize
14827 fonts use characters with serifs.
14828 These are the small
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14837 The following example shows the difference:
14838 \begin_inset Newline newline
14842 \begin_inset Newline newline
14847 text without serifs
14850 \begin_inset Newline newline
14853 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14854 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14861 \begin_layout Itemize
14866 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14867 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14868 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14871 \begin_layout Standard
14872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14879 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14880 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14888 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14889 the property to be removed.
14890 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14891 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14892 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14911 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14919 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14923 \begin_inset space ~
14928 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14939 If you, for example, set
14940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14963 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14975 \begin_layout Standard
14976 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14977 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14980 \begin_layout Section
14981 Printing and Previewing
14984 \begin_layout Subsection
14988 \begin_layout Standard
14989 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14990 using \SpecialChar LyX
14991 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14992 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14993 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14994 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14996 Additional Features
15001 \begin_layout Standard
15003 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15006 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15007 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15008 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15011 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15012 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15013 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15014 to turn your writing into printable output.
15015 This happens in two stages:
15018 \begin_layout Enumerate
15019 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15020 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15022 a file with the extension,
15023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15037 \begin_layout Enumerate
15038 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15039 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15040 to use the commands in the
15044 file to produce printable output.
15047 \begin_layout Subsection
15048 Output file formats
15049 \begin_inset Index idx
15052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15061 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15069 Simple text (ASCII)
15070 \begin_inset Index idx
15073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15074 File formats ! ASCII
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15083 This file type has the extension
15084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15096 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15100 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 \begin_layout Standard
15108 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15110 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15111 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15113 \begin_inset space ~
15119 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15120 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15121 bibliography (section
15122 \begin_inset space ~
15126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15128 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15133 If your document includes such material, use
15135 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15136 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15138 \begin_inset space ~
15142 \begin_inset space ~
15146 \begin_inset space ~
15154 \begin_inset space ~
15158 \begin_inset space ~
15164 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15165 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15168 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15171 \begin_inset Index idx
15174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15175 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15185 This file type has the extension
15186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15197 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15200 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15202 -Errors or to process it manually
15203 with console commands.
15204 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15205 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15206 's temporary directory whenever you
15207 view or export your document.
15210 \begin_layout Standard
15211 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15212 -file using the menu
15214 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15215 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15219 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15220 export variants are explained in section
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15227 reference "subsec:Export"
15234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15236 \begin_inset Index idx
15239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15249 This file type has the extension
15250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15270 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15271 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15272 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15276 \begin_layout Standard
15277 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15278 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15279 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15280 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15281 when you view the DVI.
15282 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15286 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15288 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15289 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15294 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15295 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15297 \begin_inset space ~
15303 The latter option uses the program
15305 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15311 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15314 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15315 font access (see section
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15322 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15327 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15328 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15335 \begin_inset Index idx
15338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15339 File formats ! PostScript
15347 \begin_layout Standard
15348 This file type has the extension
15349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15361 PostScript was developed by the company
15365 as a printer language.
15366 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15368 PostScript can be seen as a
15369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 programming language
15373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15388 \begin_inset Index idx
15391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15393 -packages ! pstricks
15403 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15406 \begin_layout Standard
15407 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15411 Encapsulated PostScript
15412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15415 (EPS, file extension
15416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15428 As \SpecialChar LyX
15429 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15430 convert them in the background to EPS.
15431 If, for example, you have 50
15432 \begin_inset space ~
15435 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15437 \begin_inset space ~
15440 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15441 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15443 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15444 EPS to avoid this problem.
15447 \begin_layout Standard
15448 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15450 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15451 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15459 \begin_inset Index idx
15462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 This file type has the extension
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15499 Portable Document Format
15500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15507 was derived from PostScript.
15508 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15517 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15518 looks exactly the same.
15521 \begin_layout Standard
15522 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15526 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15530 (JPG, file extension
15531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15558 Portable Network Graphics
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15562 (PNG, file extension
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15576 converts them in the
15577 background to one of these formats.
15578 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15579 will slow down your workflow.
15580 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15583 \begin_layout Standard
15584 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15586 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15592 \begin_layout Description
15594 \begin_inset space ~
15597 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15601 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15604 \begin_layout Description
15606 \begin_inset space ~
15613 ) This uses the program
15615 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15618 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15621 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15624 is a new engine, derived from
15628 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15629 access (see section
15630 \begin_inset space ~
15634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15641 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15642 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15647 \begin_layout Description
15649 \begin_inset space ~
15656 ) This uses the program
15661 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15667 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15668 font access (see section
15669 \begin_inset space ~
15673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15675 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15680 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15681 vertically written Japanese.
15684 \begin_layout Description
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15689 (cropped) This is the same as
15692 \begin_inset space ~
15697 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15698 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15699 to generate good-looking
15700 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15703 \begin_layout Description
15705 \begin_inset space ~
15708 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15712 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15716 \begin_layout Description
15718 \begin_inset space ~
15721 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15725 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15726 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15730 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15731 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15734 \begin_layout Standard
15738 \begin_inset space ~
15747 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15748 works without problems.
15749 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15750 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15754 \begin_inset space ~
15762 \begin_inset space ~
15767 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15777 \begin_inset Index idx
15780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15781 FileFormats ! XHTML
15787 \begin_inset Index idx
15790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15799 \begin_layout Standard
15800 This file type has the extension
15801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15813 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15814 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15815 When \SpecialChar LyX
15816 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15817 suitable for the purpose.
15818 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15824 between different formats, which are described in section
15826 Math Output in XHTML
15831 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15840 XHTML output remains
15841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15848 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15849 features are supported yet.
15853 and the World Wide Web
15857 Additional Features
15859 manual, for more information.
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15863 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15866 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15872 \begin_layout Subsection
15874 \begin_inset Index idx
15877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15886 \begin_layout Standard
15887 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15888 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15897 or use the toolbar button
15904 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15905 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15912 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15916 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15924 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15929 Further output formats can be selected via
15931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15932 View (Other Formats)
15934 or the toolbar button
15935 \begin_inset Graphics
15936 filename ../images/view-others.png
15938 groupId toolbarbuttons
15945 \begin_layout Standard
15946 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15947 viewer window using the menu
15949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15955 Update (Other Formats)
15960 \begin_layout Standard
15961 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15964 To have a real output, export your document.
15967 \begin_layout Section
15968 A few Words about Typography
15969 \begin_inset Index idx
15972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15981 \begin_layout Subsection
15982 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15983 \begin_inset Index idx
15986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15993 \begin_inset Index idx
15996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16006 In \SpecialChar LyX
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16019 character comes in four lengths: the
16031 , and the minus sign:
16032 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16038 \begin_layout Standard
16039 \begin_inset Tabular
16040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16041 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16044 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16045 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16074 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16141 \begin_inset space ~
16144 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16151 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16178 \begin_inset space ~
16181 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16202 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16236 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16242 \begin_layout Standard
16243 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16255 character multiple times in a row.
16256 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16257 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 \begin_layout Standard
16291 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16292 math mode and has a length of its own.
16293 Here are some examples:
16296 \begin_layout Enumerate
16297 line- and page-breaks
16298 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16308 \begin_layout Enumerate
16310 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16320 \begin_layout Enumerate
16321 Oh — there's a dash.
16322 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16332 \begin_layout Enumerate
16333 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16337 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16347 \begin_layout Subsection
16349 \begin_inset Index idx
16352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16361 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16368 \begin_layout Standard
16369 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16370 but automatically in the output.
16371 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16377 \begin_inset Index idx
16380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 following the rules of the document language.
16390 \begin_layout Standard
16392 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16396 font and with unusual constructs, like
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16406 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16407 This is done with the menu
16409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16410 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16412 \begin_inset space ~
16418 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16420 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16424 \begin_layout Standard
16425 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16426 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 would then see the hyphen
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16445 as a hyphenation possibility.
16446 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16447 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16448 as described in section
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 Prevent Hyphenation
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 \begin_inset space ~
16467 \begin_layout Subsection
16469 \begin_inset Index idx
16472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16482 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16485 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 When \SpecialChar LyX
16494 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16497 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16503 appropriate amount of space.
16504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16507 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16509 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16510 gets after another word.
16513 \begin_layout Standard
16514 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16515 not work in all cases.
16517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16528 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16529 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 Here are some examples of
16537 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16540 \begin_layout Itemize
16545 \begin_layout Itemize
16550 \begin_layout Standard
16551 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16554 \begin_layout Itemize
16556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16560 this is too much space!
16563 \begin_layout Itemize
16568 \begin_layout Standard
16569 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16572 \begin_layout Standard
16573 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16576 \begin_layout Enumerate
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16585 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16586 \begin_inset space ~
16590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16592 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16597 \begin_inset Index idx
16600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16601 Spaces ! inter-word
16609 \begin_layout Enumerate
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16618 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16619 \begin_inset space ~
16623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16625 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16630 \begin_inset Index idx
16633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 \begin_layout Enumerate
16646 \begin_inset space ~
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16654 \begin_inset space ~
16661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16663 \begin_inset space ~
16668 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16669 This function is also bound to
16672 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16678 \begin_layout Standard
16679 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16682 \begin_layout Itemize
16684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16688 \begin_inset space \space{}
16691 this is too much space!
16694 \begin_layout Itemize
16695 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16699 \begin_layout Standard
16700 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16701 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16703 will take care of this.
16706 \begin_layout Standard
16707 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16711 \begin_inset space ~
16717 feature described in the section
16719 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16724 Additional Features
16729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16731 \begin_inset Index idx
16734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16735 Typography ! Quotes
16741 \begin_inset Index idx
16744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16775 \begin_layout Standard
16777 usually sets quotes correctly.
16778 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16779 and use a closing quote at the end.
16781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16789 The keyboard character,
16793 , generates this automatically.
16796 \begin_layout Standard
16797 You can specify what character the
16801 key produces using the submenu
16807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16811 \begin_inset Index idx
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 Document ! Settings
16825 There are six choices:
16828 \begin_layout Labeling
16829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16852 \begin_layout Labeling
16853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16856 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16860 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16866 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16870 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16876 \begin_layout Labeling
16877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16880 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16884 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16890 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16900 \begin_layout Labeling
16901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16904 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16908 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16914 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16918 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16924 \begin_layout Labeling
16925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16928 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16932 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16938 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16942 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16948 \begin_layout Labeling
16949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16952 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16956 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16962 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16966 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16972 \begin_layout Standard
16973 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16976 arg "quote-insert single"
16982 \begin_layout Subsection
16984 \begin_inset Index idx
16987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16988 Typography ! Ligatures
16994 \begin_inset Index idx
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17028 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17035 \begin_layout Standard
17036 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17037 print them as single characters.
17038 These groups are known as
17043 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17044 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17046 Here are the standard ligatures:
17049 \begin_layout Itemize
17053 \begin_layout Itemize
17057 \begin_layout Itemize
17061 \begin_layout Itemize
17065 \begin_layout Itemize
17069 \begin_layout Standard
17070 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17073 \begin_layout Standard
17074 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17075 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17083 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17099 To break a ligature, use
17101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17104 \begin_inset space ~
17111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17139 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17147 \begin_layout Subsection
17149 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17151 \begin_inset Index idx
17154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17164 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17178 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17181 \begin_layout Description
17183 The name of the game.
17186 \begin_layout Description
17188 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17192 \begin_layout Description
17194 The \SpecialChar TeX
17195 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17199 \begin_layout Description
17200 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17201 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17205 \begin_layout Standard
17206 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17212 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17220 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17221 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17222 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17223 converges to the number
17224 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17227 : The actual version is
17228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17236 , the previous one was
17237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17248 \begin_layout Subsection
17250 \begin_inset Index idx
17253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17262 \begin_layout Standard
17263 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17264 space between two words.
17265 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 for units use the menu
17277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17278 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17280 \begin_inset space ~
17288 arg "space-insert thin"
17294 \begin_layout Standard
17295 Here is an example to show the differences:
17298 \begin_layout Standard
17299 \begin_inset Tabular
17300 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17301 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17302 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17303 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17310 \begin_inset space ~
17314 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17326 space between number and unit
17333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17342 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17354 half space between number and unit
17367 \begin_layout Subsection
17369 \begin_inset Index idx
17372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17373 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17382 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17384 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17385 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17386 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17387 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17388 These bits of text became known as
17399 \begin_layout Standard
17400 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17401 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17402 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17403 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17404 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17405 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17406 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17407 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17408 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17409 \begin_inset Newline newline
17417 \begin_inset Newline newline
17425 \begin_inset Newline newline
17428 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17429 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17430 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17432 \begin_inset space ~
17436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17438 key "latexcompanion"
17443 \begin_inset space ~
17447 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17453 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17454 's page break mechanism.
17457 \begin_layout Chapter
17458 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17461 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17468 \begin_layout Standard
17469 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17478 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17481 \begin_layout Section
17483 \begin_inset Index idx
17486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17504 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17507 \begin_layout Description
17510 \begin_inset space ~
17513 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17514 \begin_inset Newline newline
17518 \begin_inset Note Note
17521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17530 \begin_layout Description
17531 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17532 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17533 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17536 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17537 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17539 \begin_inset space ~
17545 \begin_inset Newline newline
17549 \begin_inset Note Comment
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17553 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17562 \begin_layout Description
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17567 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17568 set in the document settings under
17570 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17572 \begin_inset space ~
17578 \begin_inset Newline newline
17582 \begin_inset Newline newline
17586 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17595 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17596 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17601 of a comment that appears in the output.
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17611 \begin_inset Newline newline
17614 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17617 \begin_layout Standard
17618 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17630 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17633 \begin_layout Section
17635 \begin_inset Index idx
17638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17647 name "sec:Footnotes"
17654 \begin_layout Standard
17656 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17662 or the toolbar button
17665 arg "footnote-insert"
17677 \begin_inset Graphics
17678 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17687 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17688 's representation of your footnote.
17698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17717 label, the box will
17721 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17722 Clicking on the box label again will close
17735 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17736 and click on the footnote
17751 \begin_layout Standard
17752 Here is an example footnote:
17760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17761 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17769 \begin_layout Standard
17770 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17771 position where the footnote box is placed.
17772 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17773 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17774 according to the document class.
17776 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17777 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17783 ey are described in the
17786 \begin_inset space ~
17794 \begin_layout Section
17796 \begin_inset Index idx
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17808 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17818 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 \begin_inset space ~
17827 or the toolbar button
17830 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17856 appearing within your text.
17857 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17858 's representation of your margin
17867 \begin_layout Standard
17868 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17872 \begin_inset Marginal
17875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17877 This is a marginal note.
17885 \begin_layout Standard
17886 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17887 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17888 pages, right on odd pages.
17891 \begin_layout Standard
17892 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17895 \begin_inset space ~
17903 \begin_inset space ~
17911 \begin_layout Section
17912 Graphics and Images
17913 \begin_inset Index idx
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17923 \begin_inset Index idx
17926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17935 name "sec:Graphics"
17942 \begin_layout Standard
17943 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17944 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17947 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17956 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17965 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17966 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17968 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17975 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17987 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17988 of the image in the output.
17989 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17993 \begin_inset space ~
17997 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18019 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18020 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18028 \begin_layout Standard
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18036 \begin_inset space ~
18041 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18042 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18044 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18049 \begin_inset space ~
18054 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18055 with the image size is printed.
18058 \begin_layout Standard
18059 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18060 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18062 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18065 \begin_layout Standard
18067 \begin_inset Graphics
18068 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18077 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18078 the image into a float, see section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18085 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18092 \begin_layout Subsection
18094 \begin_inset Index idx
18097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18106 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18113 \begin_layout Standard
18114 You can insert images in any known file format.
18115 But as we explained in section
18116 \begin_inset space ~
18120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18122 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18126 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18128 therefore uses the program
18132 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18133 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18134 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18135 \begin_inset space ~
18139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18141 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18149 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18152 \begin_layout Description
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18157 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18158 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18159 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18163 Graphics Interchange Format
18164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18167 (GIF, file extension
18168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18180 \begin_inset Index idx
18183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18215 Portable Network Graphics
18216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18219 (PNG, file extension
18220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18232 \begin_inset Index idx
18235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18267 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18271 (JPG, file extension
18272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18296 \begin_inset Index idx
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18330 \begin_layout Description
18332 \begin_inset space ~
18335 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18337 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18338 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18339 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18340 \begin_inset Newline newline
18343 Scalable image formats can be
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 Scalable Vector Graphics
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 (SVG, file extension
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 Encapsulated PostScript
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 (EPS, file extension
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 Portable Document Format
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 (PDF, file extension
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Index idx
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18487 result will not be scalable.
18488 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18494 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18502 \begin_layout Standard
18503 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18510 \begin_layout Subsection
18511 Grouping of Image Settings
18512 \begin_inset Index idx
18515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18516 Images ! Settings grouping
18524 \begin_layout Standard
18525 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18527 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18528 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18530 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18531 need to manually change each of them.
18535 \begin_layout Standard
18536 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18539 \begin_inset space ~
18543 \begin_inset space ~
18555 \begin_inset space ~
18559 \begin_inset space ~
18565 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18566 and checking the name of the desired group.
18569 \begin_layout Section
18571 \begin_inset Index idx
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18594 arg "tabular-insert"
18599 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18603 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18604 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18605 from the rest of the table.
18606 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18607 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18609 Here is an example table:
18612 \begin_layout Standard
18614 \begin_inset Tabular
18615 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18616 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18618 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 \begin_layout Subsection
18824 \begin_layout Standard
18825 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18828 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18832 This brings up the table dialog.
18833 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18834 cursor is placed currently.
18835 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18836 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18837 done on all of your selection.
18840 \begin_layout Standard
18841 In addition to the table dialog, the
18844 \begin_inset space ~
18849 helps you in setting table properties.
18850 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18853 \begin_layout Standard
18857 \begin_inset space ~
18862 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18863 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18864 current cell respectively.
18865 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18867 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18868 of text, see section
18869 \begin_inset space ~
18873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18875 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18882 \begin_layout Standard
18883 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18884 using the check box
18893 This will merge the cells to
18897 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18898 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18899 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18900 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18901 in the last row without the upper border:
18904 \begin_layout Standard
18906 \begin_inset Tabular
18907 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18908 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18910 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18923 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18932 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19008 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 \begin_layout Standard
19044 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19045 -arguments for the table.
19046 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19047 explained in the chapter
19054 \begin_inset space ~
19060 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19061 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19062 but are visible in the output.
19065 \begin_layout Standard
19066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 Most DVI-viewers are
19078 able to display rotations.
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19091 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19096 adds lines for all cell borders.
19099 \begin_layout Subsection
19101 \begin_inset Index idx
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 Tables ! Longtables
19111 \begin_inset Index idx
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 \begin_layout Standard
19124 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19127 \begin_inset space ~
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19140 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19141 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19144 \begin_layout Description
19149 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19150 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19151 except for the first page, if
19154 \begin_inset space ~
19162 \begin_layout Description
19166 \begin_inset space ~
19171 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19172 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19175 \begin_layout Description
19180 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19181 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19182 except for the last page, if
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_layout Description
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19202 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19203 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19206 \begin_layout Description
19207 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19208 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19214 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19227 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19228 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19234 In this context, first means first in this order:
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19254 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19259 \begin_inset Tabular
19260 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19261 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19262 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19264 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19265 <row endfirsthead="true">
19266 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19272 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19277 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 <row endfirsthead="true">
19297 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <row endhead="true">
19330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <row endhead="true">
19361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <row endfoot="true">
19394 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <row endlastfoot="true">
21376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 \begin_layout Subsection
21415 \begin_inset Index idx
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21427 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21434 \begin_layout Standard
21435 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21436 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21437 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21438 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21442 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21445 \begin_layout Standard
21446 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21447 for the column in the table dialog.
21448 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21449 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21453 \begin_layout Standard
21455 \begin_inset Tabular
21456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21457 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21459 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21460 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 This is longer now.
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21662 This is longer now.
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21694 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21695 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21701 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21707 Selection with the mouse or with
21711 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21712 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21713 the selection from outside the table.
21716 \begin_layout Section
21718 \begin_inset Index idx
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21737 \begin_layout Subsection
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21742 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21743 have a fixed location.
21745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21752 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21760 \begin_inset space ~
21765 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21766 too many notes on the current page.
21769 \begin_layout Standard
21770 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21771 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21772 and pages without text.
21773 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21774 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21775 Floats are therefore numbered.
21776 Referencing is described in section
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21783 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21790 \begin_layout Standard
21791 To insert a float, use the menu
21793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21797 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21798 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21800 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21801 \begin_inset Index idx
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21811 paragraph within the float.
21812 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21813 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21814 left-clicking on the box label.
21815 A closed float box looks like this:
21816 \begin_inset Graphics
21817 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21822 – a gray button with a red label.
21825 \begin_layout Standard
21826 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21828 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21831 \begin_layout Subsection
21833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21835 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21840 \begin_inset Index idx
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 Floats ! Figure floats
21852 \begin_layout Standard
21854 \begin_inset space ~
21858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21860 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21864 was created using the menu
21866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21867 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21873 arg "float-insert figure"
21877 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21886 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21890 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21891 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21893 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21895 \begin_inset space ~
21903 arg "layout-paragraph"
21909 \begin_layout Standard
21910 \begin_inset Float figure
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 \begin_inset Graphics
21918 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21933 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21937 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21950 \begin_layout Standard
21951 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21952 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21963 ) and refer to it using the menu
21965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21971 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21975 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21976 vague references like
21977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21984 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21985 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21995 For more about cross-references, see section
21996 \begin_inset space ~
22000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22002 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22009 \begin_layout Standard
22010 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22011 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22012 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22013 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22014 as described in section
22015 \begin_inset space ~
22019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22021 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22027 \begin_inset space ~
22031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22033 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22037 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22038 You can also set the images one below the other.
22040 \begin_inset space ~
22044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22046 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22053 reference "fig:Platypus"
22057 are the subfigures.
22060 \begin_layout Standard
22061 \begin_inset Float figure
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22067 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22071 \begin_inset Float figure
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22082 name "fig:Undefinable"
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22095 \begin_inset Graphics
22096 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22107 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22111 \begin_inset Float figure
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22122 name "fig:Platypus"
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 \begin_inset Graphics
22136 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22160 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22164 Two distorted images.
22177 \begin_layout Subsection
22179 \begin_inset Index idx
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 Floats ! Table floats
22191 \begin_layout Standard
22192 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22195 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22198 or the toolbar button
22201 arg "float-insert table"
22205 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22206 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22207 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22209 \begin_inset space ~
22213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22215 reference "tab:Table-float"
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22223 \begin_inset Float table
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22234 name "tab:Table-float"
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 \begin_inset Tabular
22249 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22250 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22253 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22404 \end{array}\right]$
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22446 \begin_layout Subsection
22448 \begin_inset Index idx
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 \begin_layout Standard
22462 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22463 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22464 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22466 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22474 \begin_inset space ~
22482 \begin_layout Section
22484 \begin_inset Index idx
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22496 \begin_layout Standard
22498 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22500 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22501 \begin_inset space \space{}
22508 \begin_layout Standard
22509 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22510 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22516 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22517 and its alignment within the page.
22520 \begin_layout Standard
22522 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22532 height_special "totalheight"
22537 backgroundcolor "none"
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 This is a minipage.
22544 The text is set in an italic style.
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22551 another formatting.
22559 \begin_layout Standard
22560 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22563 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22567 as described in section
22568 \begin_inset space ~
22572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22574 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22579 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22585 \begin_layout Standard
22586 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22596 height_special "totalheight"
22601 backgroundcolor "none"
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22606 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22612 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22616 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22626 height_special "totalheight"
22631 backgroundcolor "none"
22634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22636 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22644 \begin_layout Standard
22645 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22651 \begin_layout Standard
22652 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22654 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22661 \begin_inset space ~
22669 \begin_layout Chapter
22670 Mathematical Formulas
22671 \begin_inset Index idx
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 \begin_inset Index idx
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22715 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22722 \begin_layout Standard
22723 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22728 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22731 \begin_layout Section
22733 \begin_inset Index idx
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 \begin_layout Standard
22746 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22759 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22761 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22762 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22763 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22771 \begin_layout Standard
22772 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22776 \begin_inset space ~
22781 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22784 \begin_layout Standard
22785 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22786 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22789 \begin_layout Standard
22790 This is a line with an inline formula
22791 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22797 \begin_layout Standard
22798 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22799 paragraph, like this one:
22800 \begin_inset Formula
22807 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22810 \begin_layout Standard
22812 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22814 For example, typing
22815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22828 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22829 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22833 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22836 \begin_inset space ~
22844 \begin_layout Subsection
22845 Navigating in Formulas
22846 \begin_inset Index idx
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22860 achieved with the arrow keys.
22862 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22863 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22868 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22869 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22873 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22877 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22880 \end{array}\right]$
22888 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22893 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22894 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22897 \begin_layout Standard
22902 , printed in this document as
22903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22907 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22914 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22915 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22916 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22921 For example, if you want
22922 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22930 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22940 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22944 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22949 , since in the latter case only the
22952 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22957 will be under the square root sign:
22958 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22964 \begin_layout Standard
22965 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22967 \begin_inset Formula
22969 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22978 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22979 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22982 \begin_layout Subsection
22986 \begin_layout Standard
22987 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22988 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22992 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22993 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22994 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22995 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22996 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23000 \begin_layout Subsection
23001 Exponents and Subscripts
23002 \begin_inset Index idx
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23012 \begin_inset Index idx
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 \begin_layout Standard
23025 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23028 arg "math-superscript"
23034 arg "math-subscript"
23037 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23039 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23042 , type in a formula
23045 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23055 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23061 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23065 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23071 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23077 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23086 , you have to use an extra
23090 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23091 For example, if you want
23092 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23098 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23104 Subscripts are similar: To get
23105 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23111 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23119 \begin_layout Subsection
23121 \begin_inset Index idx
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 \begin_layout Standard
23134 Create a fraction either with the command
23140 or by using the icon
23143 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23149 \begin_inset space ~
23155 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23156 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23157 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23162 To move back up, press
23167 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23168 \begin_inset Formula
23170 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23173 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23181 \begin_layout Subsection
23183 \begin_inset Index idx
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 \begin_layout Standard
23196 Roots can be created using the
23199 \begin_inset space ~
23207 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23213 arg "math-insert \\root"
23235 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23241 always produces a square root.
23244 \begin_layout Subsection
23245 Operators with Limits
23246 \begin_inset Index idx
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 \begin_inset Index idx
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23268 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23275 \begin_layout Standard
23277 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23281 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23284 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23285 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23286 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23287 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23288 The sum operator will automatically place its
23289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23296 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23298 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23302 \begin_inset Formula
23304 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23309 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23313 \begin_layout Standard
23314 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23316 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23317 behind the operator and using the menu
23319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23320 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23322 \begin_inset space ~
23326 \begin_inset space ~
23340 \begin_layout Standard
23341 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23350 \begin_inset Index idx
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Formula
23362 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23367 which will place the
23368 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23380 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23381 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23387 \begin_layout Standard
23388 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23395 Have a look at section
23396 \begin_inset space ~
23400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23402 reference "subsec:Functions"
23406 for an explanation of function macros.
23409 \begin_layout Subsection
23411 \begin_inset Index idx
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 \begin_layout Standard
23424 Most math symbols can be found in the
23427 \begin_inset space ~
23432 under one of several categories; including
23449 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23453 \begin_layout Standard
23454 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23455 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23456 don't have to use the
23459 \begin_inset space ~
23464 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23466 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23469 \begin_layout Subsection
23471 \begin_inset Index idx
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 \begin_layout Standard
23484 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23490 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23496 \begin_inset space ~
23504 arg "math-insert \\space"
23508 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23509 For example, the sequence
23514 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23517 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23519 \begin_inset Graphics
23520 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23525 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23526 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23527 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23528 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23529 , because they are negative
23531 Here are two examples:
23534 \begin_layout Standard
23544 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23550 \begin_layout Standard
23560 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23566 \begin_layout Subsection
23568 \begin_inset Index idx
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23580 name "subsec:Functions"
23587 \begin_layout Standard
23591 \begin_inset space ~
23596 contains under the button
23599 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23602 a number of function macros, such as
23603 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23607 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23615 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23622 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23623 avoid confusions, because
23624 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23628 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23634 \begin_layout Standard
23635 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23637 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23641 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23647 \begin_layout Standard
23648 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23649 are placed, as described in section
23650 \begin_inset space ~
23654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23656 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23663 \begin_layout Subsection
23665 \begin_inset Index idx
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 \begin_layout Standard
23678 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23680 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23681 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23682 commands, for example, to enter
23683 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23686 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23687 Our example is entered by typing
23692 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23705 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23709 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23712 \begin_layout Standard
23713 \begin_inset Float table
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23724 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23728 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 \begin_inset Tabular
23739 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23740 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24325 \begin_layout Standard
24326 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24329 \begin_inset space ~
24337 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24340 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24344 \begin_layout Section
24345 Brackets and Delimiters
24346 \begin_inset Index idx
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24356 \begin_inset Index idx
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24368 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24375 \begin_layout Standard
24376 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24378 For some purposes, using just the keys
24383 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24384 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24385 toolbar delimiter icon
24388 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24392 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24393 \begin_inset Formula
24395 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24403 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24404 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24408 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24411 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24417 \begin_inset Formula
24419 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24427 \begin_layout Standard
24428 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24429 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24433 \begin_layout Standard
24434 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24435 left side and right side.
24436 If you use the option
24439 \begin_inset space ~
24444 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24445 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24447 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24452 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24453 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24456 \begin_layout Standard
24457 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24458 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24459 is to go inside the brackets.
24460 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24465 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24466 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24467 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24471 arg "math-delim ( )"
24477 \begin_layout Section
24478 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24479 \begin_inset Index idx
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24489 \begin_inset Index idx
24492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 \begin_inset Index idx
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24511 \begin_layout Standard
24512 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24516 \begin_inset space ~
24524 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24528 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24529 Here is an example:
24530 \begin_inset Formula
24532 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24541 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24542 \begin_inset space ~
24546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24548 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24553 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24554 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24555 This alignment is set in the box
24560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24609 for every column as default.
24610 For example, the sequence
24611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24622 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24623 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24624 corresponds to the relevant column.
24625 The result will look like this:
24626 \begin_inset Formula
24629 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24630 column & has & has\,right\\
24631 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24640 \begin_layout Standard
24641 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24644 arg "newline-insert newline"
24647 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24648 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24653 or the math toolbar.
24656 \begin_layout Standard
24657 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24658 It can be created with the menu
24660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24661 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24663 \begin_inset space ~
24675 Here is an example:
24676 \begin_inset Formula
24690 \begin_layout Standard
24691 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24694 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24697 arg "newline-insert newline"
24701 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24706 arg "newline-insert newline"
24709 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24717 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24718 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24719 A new row is created by every further entry of
24722 arg "newline-insert newline"
24726 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24727 Here is an example:
24728 \begin_inset Formula
24730 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24731 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24736 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24737 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24738 \begin_inset Formula
24740 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24748 \begin_layout Standard
24749 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24756 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24757 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24760 reference "eq:asquared"
24765 The other types are described in section
24766 \begin_inset space ~
24770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24772 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24779 \begin_layout Section
24780 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24781 \begin_inset Index idx
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24785 Math ! Formula numbering
24791 \begin_inset Index idx
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24795 Math ! Referencing formulas
24801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24803 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24810 \begin_layout Standard
24811 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24814 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24820 \begin_inset space ~
24828 arg "math-number-toggle"
24832 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24833 within parentheses.
24834 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24835 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24836 the document class.
24837 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24838 separated by a dot:
24839 \begin_inset Formula
24849 arg "math-number-toggle"
24852 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24853 You can only number displayed formulas.
24856 \begin_layout Standard
24857 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24860 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24862 \begin_inset space ~
24866 \begin_inset space ~
24874 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24877 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24878 \begin_inset Formula
24881 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24887 To number all lines use the shortcut
24890 arg "math-number-toggle"
24896 \begin_layout Standard
24897 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24900 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24901 A label is inserted with the menu
24903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24912 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24913 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24914 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24926 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24927 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24928 We inserted in the following example the label
24929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24936 in the second line:
24937 \begin_inset Formula
24939 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24940 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24945 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24946 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24947 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24951 \begin_inset space ~
24959 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24963 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24964 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24965 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24966 as the formula number:
24969 \begin_layout Standard
24970 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24973 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24982 's cross-reference box are described in section
24983 \begin_inset space ~
24987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24989 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24994 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25002 \begin_layout Section
25003 User defined math macros
25004 \begin_inset Index idx
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_layout Standard
25018 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25019 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25020 Math macros are explained in section
25023 \begin_inset space ~
25035 \begin_layout Section
25039 \begin_layout Subsection
25041 \begin_inset Index idx
25044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 \begin_layout Standard
25054 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25055 To set a font in a formula, use the
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25066 arg "math-insert \\font"
25069 , or enter its command, listed in table
25070 \begin_inset space ~
25074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25076 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25084 \begin_inset Float table
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25095 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25099 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 \begin_inset Tabular
25110 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25111 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25145 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25259 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25406 \begin_layout Standard
25407 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25408 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25413 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25414 space when you need a space in the box.
25415 Here is an example where
25416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25427 denotes the set of numbers:
25428 \begin_inset Formula
25430 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25438 \begin_layout Standard
25439 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25440 You can, for example, put a character in
25449 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25453 \begin_inset Newline newline
25456 So it is better not to use this feature.
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25461 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25465 \begin_inset Newline newline
25468 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25474 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25475 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25481 \begin_layout Standard
25488 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25492 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25495 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25497 \begin_inset space ~
25505 \begin_layout Subsection
25507 \begin_inset Index idx
25510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 \begin_layout Standard
25520 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25522 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25526 \begin_inset space ~
25530 \begin_inset space ~
25538 \begin_inset space ~
25546 arg "math-insert \\font"
25550 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25551 in black instead of blue.
25552 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25553 Here is an example:
25554 \begin_inset Formula
25557 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25558 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25567 \begin_layout Subsection
25569 \begin_inset Index idx
25572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_layout Standard
25582 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25583 automatically chosen in most situations.
25601 For most characters,
25609 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25610 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25615 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25616 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25617 thinks are appropriate.
25618 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25621 arg "math-insert \\style"
25625 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25626 For example, you can set
25627 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25630 , which is normally in
25639 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25643 The four styles are used in the following example:
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25651 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25655 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25659 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25665 \begin_layout Standard
25666 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25667 is set in a particular size with the menu
25669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25671 \begin_inset space ~
25676 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25677 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25678 will be adjusted to correspond.
25679 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25690 \begin_layout Standard
25694 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25700 \begin_layout Section
25701 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25703 \begin_inset Index idx
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25713 \begin_inset Index idx
25716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25725 \begin_layout Standard
25727 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25728 that are in common use.
25731 \begin_layout Subsection
25732 Enabling AMS-Support
25735 \begin_layout Standard
25736 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25737 the document by selecting the checkbox
25740 \begin_inset space ~
25744 \begin_inset space ~
25748 \begin_inset space ~
25755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25759 \begin_inset Index idx
25762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 Document ! Settings
25771 \begin_inset space ~
25777 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25778 -errors in formulas,
25779 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25782 \begin_layout Subsection
25784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25786 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25791 \begin_inset Index idx
25794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25803 \begin_layout Standard
25804 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25805 provides a selection of different formula types.
25807 allows you to choose between
25828 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25829 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25835 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25838 \begin_layout Chapter
25842 \begin_layout Section
25844 \begin_inset Index idx
25847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25856 name "sec:Cross-References"
25863 \begin_layout Standard
25864 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25865 's strengths is cross-references.
25866 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25868 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25869 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25870 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25873 \begin_layout Enumerate
25877 \begin_layout Enumerate
25878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25880 name "enu:Second-item"
25887 \begin_layout Enumerate
25891 \begin_layout Standard
25892 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25897 or by pressing the toolbar button
25904 A gray label box like this:
25905 \begin_inset Graphics
25906 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25911 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25913 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25948 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25949 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25966 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25971 or the toolbar button
25974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25978 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25979 \begin_inset Graphics
25980 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25985 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25987 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26000 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26004 \begin_layout Standard
26005 As an alternative to
26007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26010 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26015 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26016 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26030 \begin_layout Standard
26031 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26032 \begin_inset space ~
26036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26038 reference "enu:Second-item"
26045 \begin_layout Standard
26046 It is recommended to use a protected space
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26051 described in section
26052 \begin_inset space ~
26056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26058 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26067 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26068 line breaks between them.
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 There are six formats of cross-references:
26075 \begin_layout Description
26076 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26079 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26086 \begin_layout Description
26087 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26088 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26100 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26107 \begin_layout Description
26108 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26109 \begin_inset space ~
26113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26114 LatexCommand pageref
26115 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26122 \begin_layout Description
26124 \begin_inset space ~
26128 \begin_inset space ~
26131 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26133 LatexCommand vpageref
26134 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26139 \begin_inset Newline newline
26142 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26143 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26144 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26145 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26146 it prints “on the next page”.
26147 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26150 \begin_layout Description
26152 \begin_inset space ~
26156 \begin_inset space ~
26160 \begin_inset space ~
26163 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26166 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26171 \begin_inset Newline newline
26174 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26180 ; otherwise it behaves like
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26197 \begin_layout Description
26199 \begin_inset space ~
26202 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26203 \begin_inset Newline newline
26207 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26215 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26225 \begin_inset Index idx
26228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 -packages ! prettyref
26236 \begin_inset Index idx
26239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 -packages ! refstyle
26252 \begin_inset Newline newline
26255 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26256 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26259 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26264 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26272 is the default and preferred because
26276 supports only English documents.
26277 The format is specified by using the command
26289 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26290 preamble of the document.
26291 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26304 ) can be done with this command
26305 \begin_inset Newline newline
26312 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26317 \begin_inset Newline newline
26320 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26322 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26324 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26331 \begin_layout Description
26333 \begin_inset space ~
26336 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26338 LatexCommand nameref
26339 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26346 \begin_layout Standard
26347 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26348 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26350 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26354 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26359 You can only use the style
26363 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26367 is always possible.
26370 \begin_layout Standard
26371 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26372 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26374 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26375 \begin_inset space ~
26379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26381 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26388 \begin_layout Standard
26389 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26397 \begin_inset space ~
26402 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26403 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26406 \begin_inset space ~
26411 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26412 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26415 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26421 \begin_layout Standard
26422 You can change labels at any time.
26423 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26424 do not need to think about this.
26427 \begin_layout Standard
26428 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26430 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26434 \begin_layout Standard
26435 References are described in detail in the section
26436 \begin_inset space ~
26440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26458 \begin_layout Section
26459 Table of Contents and other Listings
26460 \begin_inset Index idx
26463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26470 \begin_inset Index idx
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26489 \begin_layout Subsection
26491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26493 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26500 \begin_layout Standard
26501 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26504 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26510 \begin_inset space ~
26516 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26518 If you click on it, the
26522 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26523 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26524 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26526 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26528 \begin_inset space ~
26533 that is described in section
26534 \begin_inset space ~
26538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26540 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26547 \begin_layout Standard
26548 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26549 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26557 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26561 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26563 \begin_inset space ~
26567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26569 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26573 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26575 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26578 \begin_layout Subsection
26579 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26582 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26589 \begin_layout Standard
26590 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26592 You can insert them via the
26594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26598 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26601 \begin_layout Section
26602 URLs and Hyperlinks
26603 \begin_inset Index idx
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 \begin_inset Index idx
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_layout Subsection
26627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26636 \begin_layout Standard
26637 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26645 \begin_layout Standard
26646 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26648 \begin_inset Flex URL
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 \begin_layout Standard
26662 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26668 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26672 \begin_layout Standard
26673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26690 \begin_layout Subsection
26692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26694 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26701 \begin_layout Standard
26702 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26707 or with the toolbar button
26714 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26723 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26724 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26727 name "LyX's homepage"
26728 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26732 , an Email address like this:
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26735 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26736 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26741 , or a link to a file.
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26758 to the link target.
26761 \begin_layout Standard
26762 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26763 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26764 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26765 the text style dialog.
26766 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26772 name "LyX's homepage"
26773 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26780 \begin_layout Standard
26781 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26785 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26788 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26792 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26794 \begin_inset Newline newline
26802 \begin_inset Newline newline
26809 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26812 \begin_layout Section
26814 \begin_inset Index idx
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26826 name "sec:Appendices"
26833 \begin_layout Standard
26834 Appendices are created with the menu
26836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26842 \begin_inset space ~
26848 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26849 as the appendix part of the book.
26850 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26855 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26856 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26857 and the subsection number.
26858 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26864 \begin_inset space ~
26868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26870 reference "chap:Credits"
26875 \begin_inset space ~
26879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26881 reference "subsec:Export"
26888 \begin_layout Section
26890 \begin_inset Index idx
26893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26902 name "sec:Bibliography"
26909 \begin_layout Standard
26910 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26912 You can include a bibliography database,
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 Known under the name
26918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26921 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26931 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26932 manually, using the paragraph environment
26936 , which was described in section
26937 \begin_inset space ~
26941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26943 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26948 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26949 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26953 use a bibliography database.
26956 \begin_layout Subsection
26957 The Bibliography Environment
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26965 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26967 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26976 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26978 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26988 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26991 \begin_layout Standard
26992 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26997 or the toolbar button
27000 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27004 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27005 containing the available citations.
27006 Select one or more keys from the list and
27016 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27017 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27021 \begin_layout Standard
27022 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27023 entry with surrounding brackets.
27028 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27029 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27041 \begin_layout Standard
27045 Companion Second Edition
27048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27050 key "latexcompanion"
27057 \begin_layout Standard
27058 The \SpecialChar LyX
27059 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27069 \begin_layout Standard
27070 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27083 arg "layout-paragraph"
27087 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27090 \begin_layout Subsection
27091 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27093 \begin_inset Index idx
27096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 Bibliography ! Databases
27103 \begin_inset Index idx
27106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27116 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27123 \begin_layout Standard
27124 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27132 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27133 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27138 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27140 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27141 your working field in a database.
27142 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27143 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27144 list for that document.
27145 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27149 \begin_layout Standard
27150 The database is a text file with the file extension
27151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27162 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27163 The format is explained in
27164 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27170 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27174 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27179 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27180 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27181 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27183 \begin_inset Flex URL
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27196 \begin_layout Standard
27197 To use a database, use the menu
27199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27204 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27206 \begin_inset space ~
27212 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27213 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27220 Add bibliography to TOC
27222 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27227 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27228 in the document or just the cited references.
27231 \begin_layout Standard
27232 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27244 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27245 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27246 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27247 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27249 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27256 \begin_inset Newline newline
27260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27262 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27275 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27279 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27280 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27282 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27290 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27295 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27296 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27297 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27301 The following variants are possible:
27304 \begin_layout Description
27305 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27306 with other bibliography packages (e.
27307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27311 \begin_inset space \space{}
27318 ), only with the package
27322 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27326 \begin_layout Description
27327 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27328 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27329 with all bibliography packages, except
27334 \begin_layout Description
27335 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27340 , works with all bibliography packages
27343 \begin_layout Standard
27344 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27345 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27347 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27350 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27363 \begin_layout Standard
27364 When you select the option
27366 Sectioned bibliography
27370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27371 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27374 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27375 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27377 Customizing Bibliographies
27381 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27386 Additional Features
27391 \begin_layout Standard
27392 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27393 the two methods of creating them.
27394 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27395 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27396 We used the style file
27400 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27403 \begin_layout Subsection
27405 \begin_inset Index idx
27408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27409 Bibliography ! Citation format
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27418 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27419 For this feature you need to enable the option
27425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27429 \begin_inset Index idx
27432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27433 Document ! Settings
27443 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27444 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27445 style files as explained in
27446 the previous section.
27449 \begin_layout Standard
27450 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27451 the citation reference window.
27452 Here is an example where the text
27453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27457 \begin_inset space ~
27461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27464 appears after the reference:
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27472 key "latexcompanion"
27479 \begin_layout Section
27481 \begin_inset Index idx
27484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27500 \begin_layout Standard
27501 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27505 \begin_inset space ~
27510 or the toolbar button
27517 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27518 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27519 by \SpecialChar LyX
27520 as the index entry.
27523 \begin_layout Standard
27524 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27527 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27529 \begin_inset space ~
27535 A light blue box labeled
27536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27547 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27548 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27552 \begin_layout Standard
27553 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27554 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27555 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27556 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27558 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27560 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27567 \begin_layout Subsection
27568 Grouping Index Entries
27569 \begin_inset Index idx
27572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27582 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27584 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27585 lists under the entry
27586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27594 First we create the entry
27595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27603 \begin_inset space ~
27607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27609 reference "subsec:Lists"
27614 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27615 \begin_inset space ~
27619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27621 reference "sec:Itemize"
27625 , we insert the command
27628 \begin_layout Standard
27634 \begin_layout Standard
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27644 \begin_layout Standard
27645 for the enumerated list in section
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27652 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27659 \begin_layout Standard
27660 The exclamation mark
27661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27668 marks the grouping levels.
27669 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27670 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27671 If we don't have an index entry for
27672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27679 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27682 \begin_layout Subsection
27684 \begin_inset Index idx
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 Index ! Page ranges
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27697 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27699 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27700 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27701 an index entry in section
27702 \begin_inset space ~
27706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27708 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27718 Paragraph environments|(
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 and another entry at the end of section
27723 \begin_inset space ~
27727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27729 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27739 Paragraph environments|)
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27767 respectively start and end the index range.
27768 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27769 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27770 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27771 An example is the index entry
27772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27775 Document ! Settings
27776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27782 \begin_layout Subsection
27784 \begin_inset Index idx
27787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27788 Index ! Cross referencing
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27797 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27798 We referred for example in the index entry
27799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27813 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27817 ) to the index entry
27818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27825 in the same section using the entry
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27831 GIF|see{Image formats}
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27835 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27837 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27838 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27841 \begin_layout Subsection
27843 \begin_inset Index idx
27846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27847 Index ! Entry order
27855 \begin_layout Standard
27856 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27857 follow the rules for the index order.
27858 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27864 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27866 \begin_inset space ~
27870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27872 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27881 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27882 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27907 \begin_inset Index idx
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 Dummy entries ! maïs
27917 \begin_inset Index idx
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27921 Dummy entries ! maître
27927 \begin_inset Index idx
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27931 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27936 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27937 maïs, maison, maître.
27938 To achieve this, we use the command
27941 \begin_layout Standard
27944 previous entry@current entry
27947 \begin_layout Standard
27948 In our case we want to have
27949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27964 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27967 \begin_layout Standard
27973 \begin_layout Standard
27974 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27975 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27977 See the next subsection for an example.
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27987 \begin_layout Standard
27988 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27993 to generate the index (see sec.
27994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28000 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28009 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28010 -package aeguill in sec.
28011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28017 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28021 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28022 -packages although all these index
28023 commands start with
28024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28037 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28042 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28069 \begin_layout Subsection
28071 \begin_inset Index idx
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28075 Index ! Entry layout
28083 \begin_layout Standard
28084 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28085 \begin_inset Index idx
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28091 This is an italic dummy entry
28096 You can also format the page number using the character
28097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28104 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28105 -command without a backslash.
28106 We can write for example
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28112 italic page number:|textit
28115 \begin_layout Standard
28116 to get the page number in italic.
28117 \begin_inset Index idx
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28126 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28127 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28145 \begin_inset space ~
28151 Have a look at section
28152 \begin_inset space ~
28156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28158 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28162 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28166 \begin_layout Standard
28167 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28175 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28179 to generate the index, see sec.
28180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28186 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28195 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28200 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28201 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28204 key "latexcompanion"
28216 \begin_layout Standard
28217 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28219 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28220 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28221 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28222 If so, put the following in the preamble
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28241 \begin_layout Standard
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28248 in the index entry.
28249 \begin_inset Index idx
28252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28253 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28258 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28259 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28260 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28263 \begin_layout Standard
28264 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28265 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28266 a bold font for all index entries.
28267 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28279 documentation for details,
28280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28282 key "makeindex,xindy"
28289 \begin_layout Subsection
28291 \begin_inset Index idx
28294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28303 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28311 If the index generation program
28315 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28316 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28320 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28321 distribution, is used.
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28331 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28332 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28333 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28334 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28344 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28346 dialog, see section
28347 \begin_inset space ~
28351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28353 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28358 The available options are listed and explained in
28359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28361 key "makeindex,xindy"
28366 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28370 \begin_layout Standard
28371 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28372 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28380 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28381 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28384 \begin_layout Subsection
28388 \begin_layout Standard
28389 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28390 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28398 next to the standard index.
28400 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28401 that add this feature.
28408 \begin_inset Index idx
28411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 -packages ! splitidx
28418 package to generate multiple indexes.
28419 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28425 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28434 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28435 style, but it also includes
28436 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28437 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28445 \begin_layout Standard
28446 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28447 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28453 and select the option
28455 Use multiple Indexes
28462 already contains the standard index
28463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28471 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28472 also appear as a heading) to the
28476 input field and press the
28481 The new index now also appears in the list.
28482 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28483 label color to the new index.
28486 \begin_layout Standard
28487 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28497 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28498 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28499 are additional features:
28502 \begin_layout Itemize
28503 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28504 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28507 \begin_layout Itemize
28508 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28509 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28517 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28518 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28519 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28520 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28523 \begin_layout Section
28524 Nomenclature/Glossary
28525 \begin_inset Index idx
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 \begin_inset Index idx
28538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28569 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28576 \begin_layout Standard
28577 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28578 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28579 called nomenclature or glossary.
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28583 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28590 \begin_inset Index idx
28593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28595 -packages ! nomencl
28601 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28609 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28615 and then use the menu
28617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28623 \begin_inset space ~
28628 or the toolbar button
28631 arg "nomencl-insert"
28636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28647 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28651 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28652 The first is the term or
28656 that you wish to define.
28661 of the term or symbol.
28664 \begin_layout Standard
28665 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28673 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28674 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28682 \begin_layout Subsection
28683 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28684 \begin_inset Index idx
28687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 Nomenclature ! Layout
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28697 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28701 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28708 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28716 \begin_inset Newline newline
28724 \begin_inset Newline newline
28730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28737 character starts/ends the formula.
28738 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28739 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28751 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28761 \begin_layout Standard
28762 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28763 -syntax is given in section
28764 \begin_inset space ~
28768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28770 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28777 \begin_layout Standard
28781 \begin_inset space ~
28786 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28788 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28793 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28800 in this document is:
28801 \begin_inset Newline newline
28806 dummy entry for the character
28811 \begin_inset Newline newline
28823 \begin_inset space ~
28833 font use the command
28862 \begin_layout Standard
28863 If the characters |
28864 \begin_inset space \space{}
28868 \begin_inset space \space{}
28872 \begin_inset space \space{}
28876 \begin_inset space \space{}
28880 \begin_inset space \space{}
28883 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28884 a quote character in front of them.
28885 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28886 LatexCommand nomenclature
28887 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28888 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28895 \begin_layout Subsection
28896 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28897 \begin_inset Index idx
28900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28901 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28910 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28911 -code of the symbol
28913 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28915 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28918 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28919 LatexCommand nomenclature
28921 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28928 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28932 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28933 LatexCommand nomenclature
28936 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28941 They will be sorted by
28942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28968 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28971 will be sorted before the
28975 since the character
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28983 is considered in sorting.
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28987 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28990 \begin_inset space ~
28995 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28996 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28998 For the example given, you can insert
29002 in this field for the
29003 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29010 will be located before
29011 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29017 \begin_layout Standard
29018 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29023 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29032 \begin_layout Subsection
29033 Nomenclature Options
29034 \begin_inset Index idx
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29038 Nomenclature ! Options
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29051 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29052 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29055 \begin_layout Description
29056 refeq Appends the phrase
29057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29072 to every nomenclature entry, where
29078 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29081 \begin_layout Description
29082 refpage Appends the phrase
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29098 to every nomenclature entry, where
29104 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29107 \begin_layout Description
29108 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29113 class options list in the
29115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29119 In this document the options
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29135 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29140 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29143 \begin_layout Description
29153 \begin_layout Description
29156 nomrefpage Like the
29163 \begin_layout Description
29166 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29175 \begin_layout Description
29179 \begin_inset space ~
29185 \begin_inset space ~
29190 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29193 \begin_layout Standard
29195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29202 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29203 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29207 \begin_layout Standard
29215 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29218 \begin_inset Newline newline
29225 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29230 \begin_inset Newline newline
29234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29249 by their translation.
29252 \begin_layout Subsection
29253 Printing the Nomenclature
29254 \begin_inset Index idx
29257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 Nomenclature ! Printing
29266 \begin_layout Standard
29267 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29270 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29286 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29287 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29288 You can choose between these settings:
29291 \begin_layout Description
29292 Default a space of 1
29293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29299 \begin_layout Description
29301 \begin_inset space ~
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29308 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29311 \begin_layout Description
29312 Custom custom space
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29325 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29333 For example, in order to change the name to
29337 , add the following line to the preamble:
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29348 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29351 \begin_layout Subsection
29352 Nomenclature Program
29353 \begin_inset Index idx
29356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29357 Nomenclature ! Program
29363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29365 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29378 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29379 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29381 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29386 by adding options, see section
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29393 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29398 The available options are listed and explained in
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29401 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29408 \begin_layout Section
29410 \begin_inset Index idx
29413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29424 Document ! Branches
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29432 name "sec:Branches"
29439 \begin_layout Standard
29440 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29441 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29442 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29443 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29448 allows you to put text into branches.
29449 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29450 To create a branch, either select the menu
29452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29453 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29456 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29465 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29466 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29467 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29468 and whether the name of the branch should
29469 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29470 (see below for an example).
29471 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29472 to the name of the other) and to add
29473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29485 \begin_inset space ~
29488 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29489 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29493 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29494 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29499 where you can choose a branch.
29500 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29504 \begin_layout Standard
29505 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29506 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 \begin_inset Branch Question
29513 \begin_layout Standard
29514 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29526 \begin_layout Standard
29527 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29535 \begin_layout Standard
29542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29546 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29547 Consider for example a file
29548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29555 which has the above branches.
29557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29564 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 branch were inactive,
29589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 branch was active, likewise
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29620 branch was active, and
29621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29628 if both branches were active.
29629 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29632 \begin_layout Standard
29633 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29639 \begin_layout Standard
29640 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29641 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29642 definitions for each branch.
29643 For example you can define for the question branch
29647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29648 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29649 -syntax, see section
29650 \begin_inset space ~
29654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29656 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29668 \begin_layout Standard
29678 \begin_layout Standard
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29689 and for the answer branch
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29702 \begin_layout Standard
29712 \begin_layout Standard
29713 \begin_inset Branch Question
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29749 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 Now it is possible to use the
29789 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29796 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29799 commands to obtain conditional output.
29800 Here is an example formula where only the
29807 \begin_inset Formula
29809 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29817 \begin_layout Standard
29818 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29826 \begin_layout Standard
29827 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29833 \begin_inset space \space{}
29836 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29838 For this advanced usage, see the
29843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29846 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29853 \begin_layout Section
29855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29857 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29862 \begin_inset Index idx
29865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29881 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29883 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29889 \begin_inset Index idx
29892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29894 -packages ! hyperref
29899 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29900 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29901 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29902 part of the document.
29906 \begin_layout Standard
29907 The header information in the dialog tab
29911 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29912 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29913 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29914 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29918 \begin_inset space ~
29922 \begin_inset space ~
29927 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29928 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29929 and author entries.
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29937 \begin_inset space ~
29941 \begin_inset space ~
29946 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 You can specify in the dialog tab
29954 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29972 option allows long links to be split;
29975 \begin_inset space ~
29979 \begin_inset space ~
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29991 \begin_inset space ~
29996 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30004 colors the different links.
30005 The default colors are:
30008 \begin_layout Labeling
30009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30014 for hyperlinks and URLs
30017 \begin_layout Labeling
30018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30026 \begin_layout Labeling
30027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30036 but you can change these in the field
30041 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30044 \begin_layout Standard
30047 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30050 \begin_layout Standard
30055 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30056 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30057 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30065 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30066 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30067 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30077 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30078 when opening the PDF.
30080 \begin_inset space ~
30083 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30084 \begin_inset space ~
30087 1 will only display the sections.
30090 \begin_layout Standard
30091 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30092 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30098 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30108 \begin_layout Section
30110 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30114 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30121 \begin_layout Subsection
30124 \begin_inset Index idx
30127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30137 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 As \SpecialChar LyX
30146 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30147 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30148 commands and constructs,
30151 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30152 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30153 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30154 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30155 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30156 cannot support all packages and
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30161 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30162 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30163 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30167 Code box is created by the menu
30169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30176 or by the toolbar button
30189 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30197 \begin_layout Standard
30198 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30200 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30202 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30203 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30210 , you can write the command part
30216 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30217 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30221 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30222 Code box behind the word.
30223 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30224 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30228 \begin_layout Standard
30229 \begin_inset Graphics
30230 filename clipart/ERT.png
30238 \begin_layout Standard
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 This is a line with a
30247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 \begin_layout Standard
30271 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30280 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30281 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30282 know that the command is finished.
30290 \begin_layout Subsection
30291 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30293 \begin_inset Argument 1
30296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30297 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30304 \begin_inset Index idx
30307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30317 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30325 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30326 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30327 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30328 uses in the background.
30329 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30330 is based on commands, you can
30331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30339 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30340 any time if you know the right commands.
30341 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30342 is the end of the day.
30343 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30344 all caption labels bold.
30345 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30347 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30354 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30356 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30369 As result you find that the package
30374 \begin_inset Index idx
30377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30379 -packages ! caption
30385 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30390 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30394 \begin_inset space ~
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30407 usepackage[options]{package name}
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30412 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30413 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30414 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 In your case the package name is
30423 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30428 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30429 So you add the command
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30437 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30446 For more commands provided by the
30450 package, have a look at its documentation,
30451 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30468 For example if you use a
30472 class, you don't need the package
30476 , you can instead write
30479 \begin_layout Standard
30484 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30489 \begin_layout Standard
30490 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30491 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30492 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30499 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30504 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30506 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30507 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30508 Code box as described in the previous
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30513 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30514 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30519 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_inset Note Note
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30559 \begin_layout Left Header
30560 \begin_inset Argument 1
30563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 \begin_inset Note Note
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 defines the header line as described below
30595 \begin_layout Center Header
30596 \begin_inset Argument 1
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 \begin_layout Right Header
30609 \begin_inset Argument 1
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_layout Left Footer
30634 \begin_inset Argument 1
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_layout Center Footer
30659 \begin_inset Argument 1
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 \begin_inset Newline newline
30678 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30684 \begin_layout Right Footer
30685 \begin_inset Argument 1
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30710 \begin_layout Section
30711 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30714 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30719 \begin_inset Index idx
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 Document ! Header/Footer line
30729 \begin_inset Index idx
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 \begin_layout Standard
30742 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30763 \begin_inset space ~
30769 As a second step add in the menu
30771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30772 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30779 Custom Header/Footerlines
30780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30784 This module offers the following 6
30785 \begin_inset space ~
30791 \begin_layout Description
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30801 \begin_inset space ~
30805 \begin_inset space ~
30809 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_layout Description
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_inset space ~
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_inset space ~
30839 \begin_layout Standard
30840 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30843 \begin_layout Standard
30844 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30845 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30847 \begin_inset space ~
30851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30853 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30857 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30860 \begin_layout Standard
30861 \begin_inset Float figure
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 \begin_inset Tabular
30871 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30872 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30873 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30874 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30875 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30895 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30924 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30935 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30939 The normal text on the page goes here.
30940 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30942 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30943 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30948 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30968 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30986 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31038 name "fig:Page-layout"
31042 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31055 \begin_layout Standard
31056 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31064 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31073 is set to “Default”.
31074 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31083 \begin_layout Subsection
31087 \begin_layout Standard
31088 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31089 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31090 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31091 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31093 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31094 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31098 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31099 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31113 \begin_layout Description
31116 thepage prints the current page number
31119 \begin_layout Description
31122 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31125 \begin_layout Description
31128 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31131 \begin_layout Description
31134 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31135 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31142 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31145 because it usually goes in a left header.
31148 \begin_layout Description
31151 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31152 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31154 It is normally used in the right header.
31157 \begin_layout Subsection
31158 Default header/footer
31161 \begin_layout Standard
31162 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31163 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31164 footer has the page number.
31165 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31166 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31167 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31170 \begin_inset space ~
31178 \begin_layout Subsection
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31184 Some pages are different.
31185 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31186 a new part or chapter in your book.
31187 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31188 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31189 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31193 Header and footer decoration line
31196 \begin_layout Standard
31197 By default, you get a 0.4
31198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31201 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31202 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31214 in the following way:
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31224 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31227 \begin_layout Standard
31228 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31237 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31244 \begin_layout Standard
31245 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31247 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31248 \begin_inset space ~
31252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31262 Several header/footer lines
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31267 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31268 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31270 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31286 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31314 headheight}{height}
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 where height is a size in standard units.
31319 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31320 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31321 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31322 logfile with the menu
31324 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31330 \begin_inset space ~
31335 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31340 \begin_inset Index idx
31343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31345 -packages ! fancyhdr
31351 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31352 for your header/footer.
31355 \begin_layout Subsection
31359 \begin_layout Standard
31360 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31361 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31362 This example consists of the following definition:
31365 \begin_layout Description
31367 \begin_inset space ~
31376 , empty optional argument
31379 \begin_layout Description
31381 \begin_inset space ~
31384 Header empty, empty optional argument
31387 \begin_layout Description
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31398 in the optional argument
31401 \begin_layout Description
31403 \begin_inset space ~
31412 in the optional argument
31415 \begin_layout Description
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31434 \begin_inset Newline newline
31438 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31445 in the optional argument
31448 \begin_layout Description
31450 \begin_inset space ~
31459 , empty optional argument
31462 \begin_layout Description
31465 headrulewidth set to 2
31466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31474 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31489 \begin_layout Standard
31490 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31496 \begin_layout Standard
31500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31504 pagestyle{headings}
31510 \begin_inset Note Note
31513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31514 switches back to page style with the default headings
31522 \begin_layout Section
31523 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31526 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31531 \begin_inset Index idx
31534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31541 \begin_inset Index idx
31544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31553 \begin_layout Standard
31555 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31556 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31557 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31560 \begin_layout Subsection
31564 \begin_layout Standard
31565 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31571 \begin_inset Index idx
31574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 -packages ! preview-latex
31581 (on some systems named simply
31586 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31594 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31596 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31604 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31605 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31606 -package are automatically
31607 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31611 \begin_layout Subsection
31615 \begin_layout Standard
31616 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31617 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31619 activate the option
31622 \begin_inset space ~
31629 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31642 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31667 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_inset space ~
31692 \begin_layout Standard
31693 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31694 and when you finish
31698 \begin_layout Standard
31699 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31707 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31708 generated by activating the option
31711 \begin_inset space ~
31717 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31725 \begin_layout Subsection
31726 Selected document parts
31729 \begin_layout Standard
31730 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31731 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31732 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31733 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31735 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31741 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31742 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31743 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31747 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31754 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31766 is explained in section
31768 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31773 \begin_inset space ~
31783 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31784 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31785 the final rotated boxes,
31786 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31787 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31789 Here is the result:
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31793 \begin_inset Preview
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31804 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31810 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31820 height_special "totalheight"
31825 backgroundcolor "none"
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31853 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31859 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31881 \begin_layout Standard
31882 Previewing works also for colors.
31883 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 is explained in section
31909 \begin_inset space ~
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 \begin_inset Preview
31925 \begin_layout Standard
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31953 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31979 \begin_layout Standard
31980 If \SpecialChar LyX
31981 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31982 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31983 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31984 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31985 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31986 the \SpecialChar TeX
31988 If \SpecialChar LyX
31989 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31990 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31992 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31993 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31994 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31997 \begin_layout Subsection
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32004 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32007 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32014 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32016 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32018 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32019 's main window, then only this selection
32020 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32021 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32022 the source view window.
32027 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32028 ; but note that if you have
32029 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32031 not just the one which is open at the time.
32034 \begin_layout Section
32035 Advanced Find and Replace
32036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32038 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32043 \begin_inset Index idx
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32053 \begin_inset Index idx
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 \begin_layout Subsection
32069 \begin_layout Standard
32070 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32071 allows for searching of complex,
32072 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32074 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32075 The key-features are:
32078 \begin_layout Itemize
32079 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32080 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32081 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32085 \begin_layout Itemize
32086 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32087 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32088 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32089 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32092 \begin_layout Itemize
32093 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32094 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32095 outside of mathematics environments
32098 \begin_layout Itemize
32099 Search may be widened to a specific
32104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32108 \begin_inset space ~
32111 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32112 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32119 \begin_layout Itemize
32120 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32121 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32126 \begin_inset space ~
32129 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32132 \begin_layout Subsection
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32137 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32139 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32152 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32155 ) or the toolbar button
32158 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32164 Advanced Find and Replace
32169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32179 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32183 \begin_inset space ~
32188 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32191 arg "paragraph-break"
32195 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32196 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32200 arg "paragraph-break"
32203 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32207 searches backwards.
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32214 \begin_inset space ~
32219 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32228 \begin_inset space ~
32233 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32237 Searching for mathematics
32240 \begin_layout Standard
32241 Mathematical formulas, such as
32242 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32245 or something more complex like
32246 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32249 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32254 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32255 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32256 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32257 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32269 This is done by switching to the
32273 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32278 This way, entering in the
32285 \begin_layout Itemize
32286 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32287 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32290 \begin_layout Itemize
32291 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32292 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32295 \begin_layout Itemize
32296 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32297 of it only within section headings.
32298 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32299 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32303 \begin_layout Itemize
32304 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32305 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32313 The entries made in the
32317 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32320 \begin_inset space ~
32326 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32330 button or alternatively press
32333 arg "paragraph-break"
32340 while the cursor is in the
32343 \begin_inset space ~
32351 \begin_layout Standard
32352 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32354 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32358 \begin_layout Itemize
32359 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32360 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32368 with its typewriter version
32369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32383 \begin_layout Itemize
32384 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32390 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32402 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32409 (you may want to enable the
32412 \begin_inset space ~
32420 \begin_inset space ~
32425 options and disable the
32433 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32441 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32442 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32446 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32449 , or occurrences of
32450 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32454 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32460 \begin_layout Subsection
32464 \begin_layout Standard
32465 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32470 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32474 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32483 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32489 This is done with the context menu
32491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32492 Insert Regular Expression
32494 while the cursor is in the
32499 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32500 expression matching rules
32504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32505 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32515 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32516 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32522 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32523 same text in the document.
32524 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32525 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32528 \begin_layout Enumerate
32529 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32534 editor the fraction
32535 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32539 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32542 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32543 fractions with the given denominator.
32546 \begin_layout Enumerate
32547 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32559 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32564 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32565 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32566 Also, by inserting a
32567 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32570 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32571 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32574 \begin_layout Standard
32575 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32576 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32577 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32580 , and referring back to them through
32581 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32585 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32589 For example, try searching with the regexp
32590 \begin_inset Newline newline
32593 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32596 \begin_inset Newline newline
32599 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32615 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32616 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32617 sub-expressions is absolute.
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32623 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32626 always refers to the first occurrence of
32627 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32630 in all entered regexps.
32638 \begin_layout Section
32640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32642 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32647 \begin_inset Index idx
32650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32661 has a built-in spell checker.
32664 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32671 key or the toolbar button
32674 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32677 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32678 beginning of the currently selected text.
32679 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32680 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32681 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32682 scrolled so that it is visible.
32683 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32684 n, if any could be found.
32685 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32689 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32690 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32693 \begin_layout Standard
32694 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32701 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32702 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32704 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32705 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32708 \begin_inset space ~
32716 arg "dialog-show character"
32719 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32721 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32725 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32726 can be downloaded from here:
32727 \begin_inset Newline newline
32731 \begin_inset Flex URL
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32736 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32742 \begin_inset Newline newline
32746 \begin_inset space ~
32749 files for each language.
32750 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32751 \begin_inset space ~
32754 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32755 's installation subfolder
32763 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32765 \begin_inset Newline newline
32768 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32769 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32770 but in most cases these are
32786 is the language code.
32789 \begin_layout Subsection
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32796 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32797 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32799 \begin_inset space ~
32802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32805 you can set the following things:
32808 \begin_layout Description
32810 \begin_inset space ~
32813 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32814 should use for spell checking.
32815 Depending on your platform,
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32830 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32831 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32846 \begin_inset space ~
32849 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32852 \begin_layout Description
32854 \begin_inset space ~
32857 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32858 will always use the given language
32859 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32862 \begin_layout Description
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32867 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32873 \begin_inset space \space{}
32877 This should normally not be needed.
32880 \begin_layout Description
32882 \begin_inset space ~
32886 \begin_inset space ~
32889 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32901 \begin_layout Description
32903 \begin_inset space ~
32906 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32907 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32908 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32909 appear in a context menu.
32910 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32914 \begin_layout Description
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32920 \begin_inset space ~
32924 \begin_inset space ~
32927 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32931 \begin_layout Section
32933 \begin_inset Index idx
32936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32945 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32952 \begin_layout Standard
32954 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32955 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32967 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32976 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32978 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32979 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32980 which are available for many languages.
32983 \begin_layout Standard
32984 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32985 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32989 \begin_layout Subsection
32990 Setting up the thesaurus
32993 \begin_layout Standard
33002 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33006 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33011 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33017 \begin_inset space ~
33025 For instance, the US English files are named:
33028 \begin_layout Itemize
33032 \begin_layout Itemize
33036 \begin_layout Standard
33045 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33046 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33050 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33051 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33053 \begin_inset space ~
33058 ) to the path where they are installed.
33062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33063 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33064 ies, typical locations are
33070 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33074 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33078 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33081 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33087 LibreOffice-<Version>
33094 On the Mac, the default location is
33096 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33097 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33098 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33099 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33100 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33101 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33109 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33110 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33111 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33116 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33117 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33121 \begin_layout Itemize
33122 \begin_inset Flex URL
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33127 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33136 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33137 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33139 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33140 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33141 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33143 \begin_inset space ~
33148 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33150 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33151 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33155 \begin_layout Standard
33156 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33158 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33161 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33167 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33170 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33171 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33179 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33180 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33181 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33188 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33191 \begin_layout Subsection
33192 Using the thesaurus
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33196 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33201 or the toolbar button
33204 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33207 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33209 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33211 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33212 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33213 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33222 ), related terms (such as
33225 \begin_inset space ~
33234 ), compounds (such as
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33246 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33255 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33259 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33260 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33265 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33266 the dictionary, such as the above
33270 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33275 \begin_inset space \space{}
33278 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33279 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33280 For example, looking up the word form
33284 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33289 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33294 \begin_inset space \space{}
33305 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33306 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33307 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33310 \begin_layout Section
33312 \begin_inset Index idx
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 \begin_inset Index idx
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 Document ! Change Tracking
33332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33334 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33343 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33344 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33345 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33347 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33352 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33354 \begin_inset space ~
33362 \begin_layout Standard
33363 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33377 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33378 You can change the color in
33380 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33381 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset space ~
33392 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 Color ! Change tracking
33407 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33408 's status bar when the
33409 cursor is in changed text.
33410 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33413 arg "changes-merge"
33419 \begin_layout Standard
33420 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33422 \begin_inset Index idx
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33435 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 \begin_inset Graphics
33443 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33452 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33469 \begin_layout Standard
33470 \begin_inset Tabular
33471 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33472 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33473 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33474 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33475 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33484 arg "changes-track"
33492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33500 \begin_inset space ~
33503 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33505 \begin_inset space ~
33514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 arg "changes-output"
33531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33539 \begin_inset space ~
33542 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33544 \begin_inset space ~
33548 \begin_inset space ~
33552 \begin_inset space ~
33561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 Jumps to the next change
33588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33597 arg "change-accept"
33605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33616 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 arg "change-reject"
33644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33652 \begin_inset space ~
33655 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33675 arg "changes-merge"
33683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33694 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 arg "all-changes-accept"
33722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33733 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 arg "all-changes-reject"
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33776 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33782 \begin_inset space ~
33791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33815 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33849 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33851 \begin_inset space ~
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33875 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33896 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33897 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33898 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33899 the next change after the current cursor position.
33900 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33901 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33902 step to the next change.
33903 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33906 \begin_layout Standard
33907 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33908 to describe a change.
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33918 \begin_inset Index idx
33921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 -packages ! dvipost
33929 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33931 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33937 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33941 \begin_layout Section
33942 Comparison of Documents
33943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33945 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33950 \begin_inset Index idx
33953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33954 Comparison of documents
33962 \begin_layout Standard
33963 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33966 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33970 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33971 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33973 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33975 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33987 \begin_inset space ~
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34012 \begin_inset space ~
34016 \begin_inset space ~
34021 enables the change tracking option
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34037 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34040 \begin_layout Section
34041 International Support
34042 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 International support
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34055 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34056 with any language you want.
34057 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34058 up \SpecialChar LyX
34060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34062 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34069 \begin_layout Standard
34070 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34071 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34078 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34085 \begin_layout Subsection
34087 \begin_inset Index idx
34090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34097 \begin_inset Index idx
34100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34101 Document ! Settings
34107 \begin_inset Index idx
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34111 Document ! Language
34119 \begin_layout Standard
34122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34123 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34126 dialog lets you set
34128 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34138 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34143 \begin_inset space ~
34148 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34149 For details about the different encoding options see section
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34156 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34163 \begin_layout Subsection
34164 Keyboard mapping configuration
34165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34167 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34174 \begin_layout Standard
34175 If you have for example a U.
34176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34179 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34180 can use an alternate keymap.
34181 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34188 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34191 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34198 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34203 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34204 which one you want to use.
34207 \begin_layout Standard
34208 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34209 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34210 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34214 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34215 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34216 one to support the characters you want.
34217 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34224 \begin_layout Chapter
34227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34229 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34236 \begin_layout Standard
34237 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34238 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34239 topic inside the user's guide.
34242 \begin_layout Section
34244 \begin_inset Index idx
34247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34261 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34264 \begin_layout Subsection
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34269 Creates a new document.
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34278 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34279 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34282 \begin_layout Subsection
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34290 \begin_layout Subsection
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34296 Click there on a file to open it.
34299 \begin_layout Subsection
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 Closes the current document.
34307 \begin_layout Subsection
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34312 Closes all opened documents.
34315 \begin_layout Subsection
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 Saves the actual document.
34323 \begin_layout Subsection
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34331 \begin_layout Subsection
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 Saves all opened documents.
34339 \begin_layout Subsection
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34347 \begin_layout Subsection
34351 \begin_layout Standard
34352 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34353 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34354 It is described in the section
34356 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34361 Additional Features
34366 \begin_layout Subsection
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34372 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34374 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34375 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 When using the menu entry
34383 \begin_inset space ~
34388 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34405 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34406 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34409 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34413 name "subsec:Export"
34420 \begin_layout Standard
34421 You can export your document to various file formats.
34422 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34424 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34425 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34426 during its configuration.
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34430 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34432 \begin_inset space ~
34436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34438 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34445 \begin_layout Description
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34454 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34459 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34460 \begin_inset Newline newline
34463 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34464 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34468 \begin_layout Description
34469 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34475 \begin_layout Description
34477 \begin_inset space ~
34480 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34486 \begin_layout Description
34487 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34488 's native DVI-format.
34489 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34490 files paths or file names in your document.
34492 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34499 \begin_layout Description
34500 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34501 in files paths or file names
34504 \begin_layout Description
34506 \begin_inset space ~
34513 ) DVI-format using the program
34515 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34518 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34538 \begin_layout Description
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34543 (cropped) the same as
34547 but with cropped page margins.
34550 \begin_layout Description
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34555 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34559 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34564 \begin_layout Description
34568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34584 \begin_layout Description
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34590 \begin_inset space ~
34593 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34597 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34605 \begin_layout Description
34609 \begin_inset space ~
34618 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34619 source that is compilable with the program
34621 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34625 \begin_layout Description
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34634 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34635 source, additionally all images used in the document
34636 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34640 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34643 \begin_layout Description
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34652 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34653 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34654 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34662 \begin_layout Description
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34675 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34676 source that is compilable with the program
34682 \begin_layout Description
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34695 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34696 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34702 \begin_layout Description
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34707 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34708 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34714 \begin_inset space \space{}
34719 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34738 represent the version number)
34741 \begin_layout Description
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34750 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34751 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34752 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34756 \begin_layout Description
34757 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34758 's internal XHTML engine
34761 \begin_layout Description
34762 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34767 \begin_layout Description
34768 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34770 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34773 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34777 \begin_layout Description
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34782 (cropped) the same as
34785 \begin_inset space ~
34790 but with cropped page margins
34793 \begin_layout Description
34797 \begin_inset space ~
34802 PDF-format using the program
34806 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34809 \begin_layout Description
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34830 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34835 \begin_inset space \space{}
34838 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34842 \begin_layout Description
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34851 PDF-format using the program
34853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34856 , produces PDF-files directly
34859 \begin_layout Description
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34868 PDF-format using the program
34872 , produces PDF-files directly
34875 \begin_layout Description
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34884 PDF-format using the program
34888 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34891 \begin_layout Description
34895 \begin_inset space ~
34900 PDF-format using the program
34905 , produces PDF-files directly
34908 \begin_layout Description
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34920 \begin_layout Description
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34933 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34934 and then exported as text using the program
34939 \begin_layout Description
34944 PostScript format using the program
34949 \begin_layout Description
34950 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34951 source and also code in the statistical programming
34965 it is possible to use
34969 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34973 \begin_layout Standard
34974 If one of the menu entries
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34990 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34992 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35000 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35005 \begin_inset Index idx
35008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35009 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35018 \begin_layout Subsection
35022 \begin_layout Standard
35023 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35024 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35033 reference "sec:Paths"
35038 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35047 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35048 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35049 's preferences as described in section
35050 \begin_inset space ~
35054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35056 reference "subsec:Converters"
35063 \begin_layout Subsection
35064 New and Close Window
35067 \begin_layout Standard
35068 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35072 \begin_layout Subsection
35076 \begin_layout Standard
35077 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35080 \begin_layout Section
35082 \begin_inset Index idx
35085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35094 \begin_layout Subsection
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 Described in section
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35106 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35113 \begin_layout Subsection
35114 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 Described in section
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35125 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35132 \begin_layout Subsection
35136 \begin_layout Standard
35137 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35138 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35141 \begin_layout Subsection
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Selects the whole document.
35149 \begin_layout Subsection
35150 Find & Replace (Quick)
35153 \begin_layout Standard
35154 Described in section
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35161 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35168 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35173 Described in section
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35180 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35187 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35191 \begin_layout Standard
35192 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35196 \begin_layout Subsection
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 Described in section
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35208 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35215 \begin_layout Subsection
35217 \begin_inset Index idx
35220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 Paragraph ! Settings
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35231 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35235 \begin_layout Standard
35236 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35237 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35243 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35244 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35254 \begin_layout Subsection
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35259 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35260 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35261 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35268 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35269 The properties of tables are described in section
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35276 reference "sec:Tables"
35280 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35281 \begin_inset space ~
35285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35287 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35294 \begin_layout Subsection
35295 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35299 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35301 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35308 reference "sec:Nesting"
35313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35315 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35322 \begin_layout Subsection
35325 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35328 \begin_layout Standard
35329 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35330 nts of the same type.
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35338 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35342 for an explanation.
35345 \begin_layout Section
35347 \begin_inset Index idx
35350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35359 \begin_layout Standard
35360 At the bottom of the
35364 menu the opened documents are listed.
35367 \begin_layout Subsection
35368 Open/Close all Insets
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35372 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35375 \begin_layout Subsection
35376 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 Math macros are described in the
35391 \begin_layout Subsection
35395 \begin_layout Standard
35396 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35397 \begin_inset space ~
35401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35403 reference "sec:Navigating"
35408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35410 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35417 \begin_layout Subsection
35421 \begin_layout Standard
35422 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35430 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35437 \begin_layout Subsection
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35442 Opens a window showing console messages.
35443 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35448 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35449 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35450 is processing the document.
35453 \begin_layout Subsection
35455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35457 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35462 \begin_inset Index idx
35465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35474 \begin_layout Standard
35475 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35476 All toolbars and the
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35484 can be turned on and off.
35489 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35518 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35522 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35534 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35538 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35539 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35540 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35541 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35542 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35545 \begin_layout Standard
35547 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35554 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35561 \begin_layout Subsection
35565 \begin_layout Standard
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35594 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35595 's main window vertically while
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35623 will split it horizontally.
35624 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35625 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35626 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35627 three or more documents at the same time.
35628 To close a split view, use the menu
35631 \begin_inset space ~
35635 \begin_inset space ~
35643 \begin_layout Subsection
35647 \begin_layout Standard
35648 Closes a split view.
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35657 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35658 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35659 's main window fullscreen.
35660 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35661 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35664 \begin_layout Section
35666 \begin_inset Index idx
35669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_layout Subsection
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35684 \begin_inset space ~
35688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35690 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35701 \begin_layout Subsection
35703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35705 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35713 Here you can insert the following characters:
35716 \begin_layout Description
35721 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35724 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35725 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35726 -packages you have installed.
35727 You can get a complete display by checking
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35736 \begin_inset Newline newline
35740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 Not all characters will be visible in the
35752 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35760 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35764 ) can display every character.
35772 \begin_layout Description
35773 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35777 \begin_layout Description
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35786 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35793 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35800 \begin_layout Description
35802 \begin_inset space ~
35805 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35809 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35815 \begin_layout Description
35817 \begin_inset space ~
35820 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35830 \begin_layout Description
35832 \begin_inset space ~
35835 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35839 \begin_layout Description
35841 \begin_inset space ~
35844 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35848 \begin_layout Description
35850 \begin_inset space ~
35853 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35859 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35865 \begin_layout Description
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35870 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35874 \begin_layout Description
35876 \begin_inset space ~
35880 \begin_inset Index idx
35883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35890 \begin_inset Index idx
35893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35899 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35900 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35902 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35908 \begin_inset Index idx
35911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35919 \begin_inset Newline newline
35922 More information about this feature can be found in the
35928 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35934 \begin_layout Subsection
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35939 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35942 \begin_layout Description
35943 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35944 \begin_inset script superscript
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35955 \begin_layout Description
35956 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35957 \begin_inset script subscript
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35968 \begin_layout Description
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35973 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35980 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35987 \begin_layout Description
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35992 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35999 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36006 \begin_layout Description
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36011 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36018 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36030 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36036 \begin_inset space \space{}
36039 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36040 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36049 To insert a fraction use the command
36054 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36058 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36067 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36074 \begin_layout Description
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36079 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36086 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36093 \begin_layout Description
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36098 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36099 \begin_inset space ~
36103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36105 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36112 \begin_layout Description
36114 \begin_inset space ~
36117 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36124 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36131 \begin_layout Description
36132 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36139 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36146 \begin_layout Description
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36151 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36158 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36165 \begin_layout Description
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36170 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36177 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36184 \begin_layout Description
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36193 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36200 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36207 \begin_layout Description
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36212 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36213 as described in section
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36220 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36227 \begin_layout Description
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36232 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36239 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36246 \begin_layout Description
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36251 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36252 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36260 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36267 \begin_layout Description
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36272 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36273 \begin_inset space ~
36277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36279 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36286 \begin_layout Description
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36292 \begin_inset space ~
36295 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36302 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36309 \begin_layout Subsection
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36314 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36339 are described in section
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36346 reference "sec:toc"
36355 is described in section
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36362 reference "sec:Index"
36370 is described in section
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36377 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36383 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36386 is described in section
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36393 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36400 \begin_layout Subsection
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36405 To insert floats, as described in section
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36412 reference "sec:Floats"
36416 and in detail the chapter
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36431 \begin_layout Subsection
36435 \begin_layout Standard
36436 To insert notes, described in section
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36443 reference "sec:Notes"
36450 \begin_layout Subsection
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36457 Branches are described in section
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36464 reference "sec:Branches"
36471 \begin_layout Subsection
36475 \begin_layout Standard
36476 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36477 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36479 An example is the document class
36480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36487 with three custom insets.
36490 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36494 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36500 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36503 \begin_layout Subsection
36505 \begin_inset Index idx
36508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36517 \begin_layout Standard
36518 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36520 For more information see chapter
36522 External Document Parts
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36531 \begin_layout Subsection
36533 \begin_inset Index idx
36536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36545 \begin_layout Standard
36546 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36547 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36554 \begin_inset space ~
36562 \begin_layout Subsection
36566 \begin_layout Standard
36571 dialog as described in section
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36578 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36585 \begin_layout Subsection
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36594 as described in section
36595 \begin_inset space ~
36599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36601 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36608 \begin_layout Subsection
36612 \begin_layout Standard
36617 as described in section
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36624 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36631 \begin_layout Subsection
36633 \begin_inset Index idx
36636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36643 \begin_inset Index idx
36646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36647 Longtables ! Caption
36655 \begin_layout Standard
36656 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36657 Floats are described in section
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36664 reference "sec:Floats"
36668 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_layout Subsection
36687 \begin_layout Standard
36688 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36695 reference "sec:Index"
36702 \begin_layout Subsection
36706 \begin_layout Standard
36707 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36714 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36721 \begin_layout Subsection
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36726 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36727 Tables are described in section
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36734 reference "sec:Tables"
36738 and in detail in the chapter
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36753 \begin_layout Subsection
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36763 Graphics are described in section
36764 \begin_inset space ~
36768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36770 reference "sec:Graphics"
36777 \begin_layout Subsection
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 Inserts a URL as described in section
36783 \begin_inset space ~
36787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36789 reference "subsec:URLs"
36796 \begin_layout Subsection
36800 \begin_layout Standard
36801 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36808 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36815 \begin_layout Subsection
36819 \begin_layout Standard
36820 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36827 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36834 \begin_layout Subsection
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36839 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36859 title or caption of a float.
36860 Inserts a short title as described in section
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36867 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36874 \begin_layout Subsection
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36881 Code box as described in section
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36888 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36895 \begin_layout Subsection
36897 \begin_inset Index idx
36900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 Inserts a program listings box.
36911 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36913 Program Code Listings
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_layout Subsection
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36931 Inserts the actual date.
36932 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36936 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36944 \begin_inset space ~
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36971 \begin_layout Section
36973 \begin_inset Index idx
36976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36986 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36990 of the current document.
36991 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36998 \begin_layout Standard
36999 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37000 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37001 to jump, for example, between section
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37010 2.5 and use the submenu
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37040 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37044 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37050 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37053 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37056 \begin_layout Standard
37057 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37066 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37074 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37078 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37092 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37093 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37109 \begin_layout Subsection
37113 \begin_layout Standard
37114 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37117 The \SpecialChar LyX
37118 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37133 manual for a detailed description.
37136 \begin_layout Section
37138 \begin_inset Index idx
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37150 \begin_layout Subsection
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 Change Tracking is described in section
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37162 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37169 \begin_layout Subsection
37177 \begin_layout Standard
37178 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37179 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37180 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37182 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37183 to the clipboard or update the view.
37184 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37188 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 Start Appendix Here
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37194 as described in section
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37201 reference "sec:Appendices"
37208 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37216 \begin_layout Standard
37217 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37218 default output format for the document (menu
37220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37221 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37222 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37224 \begin_inset space ~
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37240 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37244 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37248 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37253 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37258 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37276 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37280 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37281 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37284 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37289 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37294 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37304 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37309 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37310 when it is first configured.
37311 The default output format is
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37322 \begin_layout Subsection
37323 View (Other Formats)
37326 \begin_layout Standard
37327 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37328 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37329 actual document with an external program.
37330 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37331 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37332 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37334 All possible formats are listed in section
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37341 reference "subsec:Export"
37346 You should at least see the menu entry
37351 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37353 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37361 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37366 \begin_inset Index idx
37369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37370 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37379 \begin_layout Standard
37380 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37381 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37383 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37384 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37389 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37394 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37404 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37409 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37410 when it is first configured.
37413 \begin_layout Subsection
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37423 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37426 \begin_layout Subsection
37427 Update (Other Formats)
37430 \begin_layout Standard
37431 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37432 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37435 \begin_layout Subsection
37436 View Master Document
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 manual for more information on this topic).
37462 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37463 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37476 generates the output of the whole book, while
37480 will just output the chapter alone.
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37485 in the document settings (menu
37487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset space ~
37505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37507 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37511 ) or in the preferences (menu
37513 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37514 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37519 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37524 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37542 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37549 \begin_layout Subsection
37550 Update Master Document
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37575 manual for more information on this topic).
37576 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37577 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37581 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37582 in the document settings (menu
37584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37604 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37608 ) or in the preferences (menu
37610 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37611 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37616 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37621 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37639 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37646 \begin_layout Subsection
37648 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278411
37650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37652 name "subsec:Compressed"
37661 \begin_layout Standard
37662 Un/compresses the current document.
37664 \change_inserted -195340706 1447279328
37665 Use this if you want to save a compressed document in uncompressed format
37667 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37670 Additional \SpecialChar LyX
37678 \begin_layout Subsection
37682 \begin_layout Standard
37683 The document settings are described in appendix
37684 \begin_inset space ~
37688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37690 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37697 \begin_layout Section
37699 \begin_inset Index idx
37702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37711 \begin_layout Subsection
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 Spell checking is explained in section
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37723 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 The thesaurus is described in section
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37742 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37749 \begin_layout Subsection
37751 \begin_inset Index idx
37754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 \begin_inset Index idx
37764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37773 \begin_layout Standard
37774 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37775 the highlighted document part.
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37784 \begin_inset Index idx
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37788 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37797 \begin_layout Standard
37798 Generates with the help of the program
37800 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37803 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37804 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37805 This feature is not available on Windows.
37808 \begin_layout Subsection
37814 \begin_inset Index idx
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37838 to see the full filename paths.
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 \begin_inset Index idx
37846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37857 files as described in section
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37864 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37871 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 \begin_inset Index idx
37876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37889 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 \begin_inset Index idx
37910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37911 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37921 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37922 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37923 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37924 -packages and programs it needs; see
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37932 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37939 \begin_layout Subsection
37943 \begin_layout Standard
37948 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37949 \begin_inset space ~
37953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37955 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37962 \begin_layout Section
37964 \begin_inset Index idx
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37977 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37978 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37980 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37989 \begin_inset space ~
37994 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37995 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37996 packages and classes found
37997 by \SpecialChar LyX
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38005 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38021 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38026 \begin_layout Section
38028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38030 name "sec:Toolbars"
38037 \begin_layout Standard
38038 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38045 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38054 This is described in the
38056 Additional Features
38061 \begin_layout Subsection
38063 \begin_inset Index idx
38066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38076 \begin_inset Graphics
38077 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 \begin_inset Note Note
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38119 manual for more information.
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 \begin_inset Tabular
38136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38137 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 \begin_inset Graphics
38146 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38160 pull-down box for the environments
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38182 \begin_inset Tabular
38183 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38184 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38185 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38186 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38210 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38270 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38286 arg "dialog-show print"
38294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38300 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38330 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38367 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38593 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38621 Emphasize text, function of the
38623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38628 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38658 Set text to noun style, function of the
38660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38665 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 arg "textstyle-apply"
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Format text using the current settings in the
38697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38702 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38735 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38737 \begin_inset space ~
38746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 arg "tabular-insert"
38791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38813 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 Toggle outline window on/off,
38827 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38855 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38882 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38895 \begin_layout Subsection
38897 \begin_inset Index idx
38900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 \begin_layout Standard
38910 \begin_inset Graphics
38911 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38919 \begin_layout Standard
38920 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38926 \begin_layout Standard
38927 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38931 \begin_layout Standard
38932 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38938 \begin_layout Standard
38939 \begin_inset Tabular
38940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38941 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38942 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38943 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38980 arg "layout Enumerate"
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39007 arg "layout Itemize"
39015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39061 arg "layout Description"
39069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39088 arg "depth-increment"
39096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39102 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39108 \begin_inset space ~
39117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39126 arg "depth-decrement"
39134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39164 arg "float-insert figure"
39172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39179 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 arg "float-insert table"
39203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39210 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39350 arg "nomencl-insert"
39358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39384 arg "footnote-insert"
39392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39414 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39430 \begin_inset space ~
39439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39463 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39483 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39623 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 arg "dialog-show character"
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39662 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 arg "layout-paragraph"
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39726 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39740 \begin_layout Subsection
39741 View/Update Toolbar
39742 \begin_inset Index idx
39745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39746 Toolbar ! View / Update
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 \begin_inset Graphics
39756 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39764 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39771 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39775 \begin_layout Standard
39776 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39783 \begin_inset Tabular
39784 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39785 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39786 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39787 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 arg "buffer-update"
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 arg "master-buffer-view"
39865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 arg "master-buffer-update"
39899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39945 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 Synchronize with Output
39952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 \begin_inset Graphics
39958 filename ../images/view-others.png
39960 groupId toolbarbuttons
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39978 View (Other Formats)
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 \begin_inset Graphics
39990 filename ../images/update-others.png
39992 groupId toolbarbuttons
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40008 Update (Other Formats)
40021 \begin_layout Standard
40022 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40026 \begin_layout Subsection
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40038 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40042 , the table toolbar
40043 \begin_inset Index idx
40046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40060 manual and the math macro toolbar
40061 \begin_inset Index idx
40064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 \begin_layout Chapter
40078 The Document Settings
40079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40081 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40086 \begin_inset Index idx
40089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40090 Document ! Settings
40098 \begin_layout Standard
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40107 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40108 is called with the menu
40110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40114 You can save your document settings as default with the
40116 Save as Document Defaults
40118 button in any dialog.
40119 This will create a template named
40123 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40124 when you create a new document without
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40133 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40134 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40138 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40139 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40140 to find the one you are looking for.
40141 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40142 the submenus of the dialog.
40144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40148 \begin_inset space \space{}
40152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40159 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40160 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40161 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40164 \begin_layout Section
40168 \begin_layout Standard
40169 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40171 Document classes are described in section
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40178 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40195 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40200 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40201 as a layout for a document class.
40202 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40204 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40213 \begin_layout Standard
40214 Some classes use special class options by default.
40215 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40219 and you can decide to use them or not.
40220 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40221 recommended you leave them untouched.
40226 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40227 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40232 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40234 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40240 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40241 \begin_inset Newline newline
40246 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40249 \begin_inset Newline newline
40252 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40253 distribution, see section
40258 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40260 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40272 \begin_layout Standard
40277 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40278 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40279 in the background if the child document
40280 is opened without its master.
40281 This way child documents are always compilable.
40282 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40297 \begin_layout Standard
40298 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40309 \begin_inset Index idx
40312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40314 -packages ! prettyref
40320 \begin_inset Index idx
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40325 -packages ! refstyle
40330 for cross-references, see section
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40337 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40344 \begin_layout Section
40348 \begin_layout Standard
40349 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40350 Please refer to the section
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40366 manual for details.
40369 \begin_layout Section
40373 \begin_layout Standard
40374 Modules are explained in section
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40381 reference "subsec:Modules"
40388 \begin_layout Section
40392 \begin_layout Standard
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40400 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40407 \begin_layout Section
40411 \begin_layout Standard
40412 The document font settings are described in section
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40419 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40426 \begin_layout Section
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40448 and whether it should be a
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40456 can also be specified here.
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40460 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40461 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40462 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40464 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40467 \begin_layout Standard
40470 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40473 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40474 justifies the text on screen.
40475 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40479 \begin_layout Section
40483 \begin_layout Standard
40484 This dialog is described in sections
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40498 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40505 \begin_layout Section
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40510 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40517 reference "subsec:Margins"
40524 \begin_layout Section
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40528 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40533 \begin_inset Index idx
40536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40537 Language ! Encoding
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40546 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40547 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40548 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40550 is always encoded in utf8).
40551 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40552 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40553 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40554 -command is not known for
40555 a particular character).
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 If you use the option
40564 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40565 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40566 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40568 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40569 exactly one encoding.
40570 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40575 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40576 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40577 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40578 installation supports Unicode), choose
40579 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40580 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40581 is quite incomplete, so
40582 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40587 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40588 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40589 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40590 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40591 -commands is not used, because all
40592 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40593 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40594 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40595 , two new alternative engines
40596 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40598 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40600 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40636 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40640 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40643 \begin_layout Standard
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40652 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40653 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40663 The possible settings are:
40666 \begin_layout Description
40667 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40670 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40674 \begin_inset space ~
40678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40680 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40687 \begin_layout Description
40688 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40689 format you will use.
40690 In many cases this will be
40695 \begin_inset Index idx
40698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40706 If the newer package
40711 \begin_inset Index idx
40714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40716 -packages ! polyglossia
40721 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40722 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40723 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40725 this package will be used instead of
40732 \begin_layout Description
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40745 would be more appropriate.
40748 \begin_layout Description
40749 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40750 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40754 (for German texts), type in
40757 \begin_inset Newline newline
40762 usepackage{ngerman}
40765 \begin_layout Description
40766 None will not use a language package.
40767 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40774 \begin_layout Description
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40791 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40797 \begin_inset Index idx
40800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40802 -packages ! inputenc
40808 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40809 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40810 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40814 \begin_layout Description
40815 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40817 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40818 commands, which may result in a big
40819 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40820 -commands are needed.
40823 \begin_layout Description
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40832 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40835 \begin_layout Description
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40844 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40847 \begin_layout Description
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40852 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40855 \begin_layout Description
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40864 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40865 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40868 \begin_layout Description
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40877 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40881 \begin_layout Description
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40890 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40891 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40894 \begin_layout Description
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40907 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_layout Description
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40927 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40928 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40931 \begin_layout Description
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40940 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40941 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40942 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40943 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40954 \begin_layout Description
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40963 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40964 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40965 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40967 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_layout Description
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40987 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40990 \begin_layout Description
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset space ~
40999 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41014 \begin_layout Description
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41019 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41022 \begin_layout Description
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41027 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41030 \begin_layout Description
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41039 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_layout Description
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41063 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41066 \begin_layout Description
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41078 \begin_layout Description
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41087 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41093 \begin_inset Index idx
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41103 , when using this, set the document language to
41108 \begin_layout Description
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41117 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41122 , when using this, set the document language to
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41140 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41146 \begin_inset Index idx
41149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 -packages ! japanese
41156 , when using this, set the document language to
41161 \begin_layout Description
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41175 , when using this, set the document language to
41180 \begin_layout Description
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41189 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41194 , when using this, set the document language to
41199 \begin_layout Description
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41204 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41220 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41223 \begin_layout Description
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41237 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41238 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41241 \begin_layout Description
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_layout Description
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41262 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41263 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41266 \begin_layout Description
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41275 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41281 \begin_inset Index idx
41284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41294 \begin_layout Description
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41307 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41314 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41317 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41324 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41325 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41327 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41330 \begin_layout Description
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41339 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41345 \begin_inset Index idx
41348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41355 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41358 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41363 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41369 \begin_inset Index idx
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 -packages ! inputenc
41380 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41397 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41404 \begin_layout Description
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41417 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41418 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41419 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41423 \begin_layout Description
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41436 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41437 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41440 \begin_layout Section
41442 \begin_inset Index idx
41445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41452 \begin_inset Index idx
41455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 \begin_inset Index idx
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41466 Color ! Shaded boxes
41472 \begin_inset Index idx
41475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41484 \begin_layout Standard
41485 Here you can alter the font color for the
41489 (default: black), for
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41497 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41501 (default: white) and for
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41514 sets the color back to the default.
41517 \begin_layout Standard
41518 Clicking any button showing
41526 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41527 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41528 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41529 later more quickly.
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41533 Note, if you change the
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41541 font color and use the option
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41549 in the document settings under
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41557 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41564 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41571 \begin_layout Standard
41572 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41578 \begin_layout Standard
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41591 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41597 Code after a forced page break:
41600 \begin_layout Itemize
41601 For the page color:
41602 \begin_inset Newline newline
41609 pagecolor{color name}
41612 \begin_layout Itemize
41613 For the text color:
41614 \begin_inset Newline newline
41624 \begin_layout Standard
41625 You are restricted to one of
41661 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset Newline newline
41677 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41678 names to refer to them:
41681 \begin_layout Itemize
41687 \begin_inset Newline newline
41692 page_backgroundcolor
41695 \begin_layout Itemize
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41705 \begin_inset Newline newline
41713 \begin_layout Itemize
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41723 \begin_inset Newline newline
41731 \begin_layout Itemize
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_inset Newline newline
41749 \begin_layout Standard
41750 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41769 \begin_layout Section
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41774 Here you can adjust the
41778 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41782 as described in section
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41789 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41796 \begin_layout Section
41800 \begin_layout Standard
41801 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41807 \begin_inset Index idx
41810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41822 \begin_inset Index idx
41825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 -packages ! jurabib
41835 Sectioned bibliography
41837 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41843 \begin_inset Index idx
41846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41848 -packages ! bibtopic
41853 and you can select a
41857 for the generation of the bibliography.
41858 For a further description see section
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41865 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41872 \begin_layout Section
41876 \begin_layout Standard
41877 Here you can define the
41881 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41883 \begin_inset space ~
41887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41889 reference "sec:Index"
41896 \begin_layout Section
41900 \begin_layout Standard
41901 The PDF properties are explained in section
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41908 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41915 \begin_layout Section
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41920 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41921 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41927 \begin_inset Index idx
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 -packages ! amsmath
41942 \begin_inset Index idx
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41947 -packages ! amssymb
41957 \begin_inset Index idx
41960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41972 \begin_inset Index idx
41975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41987 \begin_inset Index idx
41990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41992 -packages ! mathdots
42002 \begin_inset Index idx
42005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42007 -packages ! mathtools
42017 \begin_inset Index idx
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42032 \begin_inset Index idx
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42037 -packages ! stackrel
42047 \begin_inset Index idx
42050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 -packages ! stmaryrd
42062 \begin_inset Index idx
42065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42067 -packages ! undertilde
42072 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42075 \begin_layout Description
42076 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42077 -errors in formulas,
42078 ensure that you have this enabled.
42081 \begin_layout Description
42082 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42083 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42084 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42088 \begin_layout Description
42089 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42104 \begin_layout Description
42105 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42120 \begin_layout Description
42121 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42132 \begin_layout Description
42133 mathtools is used for the math commands
42169 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42176 \begin_layout Description
42177 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42179 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42188 \begin_layout Description
42189 stackrel is used for the math command
42206 \begin_layout Description
42207 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42210 \begin_layout Description
42211 undertilde is used for the math command
42219 Accents for one Character
42228 \begin_layout Section
42232 \begin_layout Standard
42233 The float placement options are described in the section
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_inset space ~
42252 \begin_layout Section
42256 \begin_layout Standard
42257 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42259 Program Code Listings
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_layout Section
42276 \begin_layout Standard
42277 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42285 set to be used and set the
42290 The itemize environment is described in section
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42297 reference "sec:Itemize"
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42305 You can furthermore specify a
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42313 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42314 command of the desired character.
42315 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42322 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42328 \begin_inset space \space{}
42332 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42342 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42343 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42347 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42356 -packages in the preamble (menu
42359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42360 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42369 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42373 usepackage{textcomp}
42376 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42380 usepackage{amssymb}
42390 \begin_layout Section
42394 \begin_layout Standard
42395 Branches are described in section
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42402 reference "sec:Branches"
42409 \begin_layout Section
42411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42413 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42420 \begin_layout Standard
42421 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42424 \begin_layout Description
42426 \begin_inset space ~
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42433 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42453 View Master Document
42454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42461 Update Master Document
42462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42469 menu or the toolbar.
42470 The default is set in
42472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42473 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42478 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42488 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42495 \begin_layout Description
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42501 \begin_inset space ~
42504 Output settings for the menu
42506 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42514 For a detailed description see section
42516 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_layout Description
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42538 Options offers settings for the export format
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42551 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42555 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42564 settings are described in detail in section
42566 Math Output in XHTML
42571 \begin_inset space ~
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42589 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42592 \begin_layout Section
42600 \begin_layout Standard
42601 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42603 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42605 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42607 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42611 \begin_layout Standard
42612 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42613 -syntax is given in section
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42620 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42627 \begin_layout Chapter
42633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42635 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42640 \begin_inset Index idx
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42659 It has the following submenus.
42662 \begin_layout Section
42666 \begin_layout Subsection
42670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42671 User Interface File
42672 \begin_inset Index idx
42675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 Customization ! of toolbars
42682 \begin_inset Index idx
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 Customization ! of menus
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42695 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42696 interface (ui) file.
42697 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42705 \begin_layout Description
42710 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42713 \begin_layout Description
42720 the menu entries in popup context menus
42723 \begin_layout Description
42728 specifies the toolbar buttons
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42733 and edit the entries.
42736 \begin_layout Standard
42737 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42749 entries must be finished with an explicit
42774 and in the case of the
42775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42787 The syntax for the entries is:
42790 \begin_layout Standard
42791 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42820 \begin_layout Standard
42822 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42825 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42826 -functions are listed in the menu
42828 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42839 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42846 For example, assuming you use the menu
42848 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42851 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42855 \begin_layout Standard
42856 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42880 \begin_layout Standard
42882 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42897 to have the sixth bookmark.
42900 \begin_layout Standard
42904 \begin_inset space ~
42909 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42910 's toolbar buttons.
42911 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42915 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42929 Enable tool tips in main work area
42931 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42944 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42945 should display in the menu
42947 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42957 \begin_layout Subsection
42961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Restore window layouts and geometries
42971 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42972 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42979 Restore cursor positions
42981 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42988 Load opened files from last session
42990 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42997 Clear all session information
42999 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43000 sessions (cursor positions, names
43001 of last opened documents, etc.).
43004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43008 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43013 \begin_inset Index idx
43016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43028 Backup original documents when saving
43030 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43031 it was saved the last time.
43032 It is stored in the
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43047 reference "sec:Paths"
43051 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43054 \begin_inset space ~
43060 The backup file has the file extension
43061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43075 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Backup documents, every
43080 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43083 \begin_layout Standard
43086 Save documents compressed by default
43088 always saves files in a compressed format.
43090 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278517
43091 This applies to newly created documents only.
43092 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving
43094 \begin_inset space ~
43098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43100 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43110 Windows & work area
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43116 Open documents in tabs
43118 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43127 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43140 reference "sec:Paths"
43144 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43151 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43152 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43153 of \SpecialChar LyX
43155 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43156 instance is created for each file.
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43162 Single close-tab button
43164 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43167 \begin_inset Graphics
43168 filename ../images/closetab.png
43175 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43176 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43180 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43188 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43189 before the change takes effect.
43197 \begin_layout Standard
43202 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43204 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43206 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43210 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43211 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43212 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43215 \begin_layout Subsection
43217 \begin_inset Index idx
43220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43229 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43241 \begin_layout Standard
43242 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43250 This section only deals with the fonts
43254 the \SpecialChar LyX
43256 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43260 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43272 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43289 (depends on the system) as its
43292 \begin_inset space ~
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43309 You can change the font size with the
43316 \begin_layout Standard
43321 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43326 points have the size of 1
43327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43337 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43342 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43347 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43354 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43364 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43366 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43367 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43368 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43369 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43370 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43372 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43373 \begin_inset space ~
43379 \begin_layout Subsection
43381 \begin_inset Index idx
43384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43385 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43392 \begin_inset Index idx
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43404 \begin_layout Standard
43405 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43406 by choosing an item in the
43407 list and selecting the
43414 \begin_layout Standard
43415 By checking the option
43419 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43422 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43432 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43435 \begin_layout Subsection
43437 \begin_inset Index idx
43440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 \begin_layout Standard
43450 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43454 \begin_layout Standard
43459 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43460 This feature is described in section
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43467 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43474 \begin_layout Standard
43475 Checking the option
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_inset space ~
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43491 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43494 \begin_layout Section
43496 \begin_inset Index idx
43499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43508 \begin_layout Subsection
43512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43519 Cursor follows scrollbar
43521 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43525 \begin_layout Standard
43526 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43527 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43528 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43534 Scroll below end of document
43536 is self-explanatory.
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43540 In \SpecialChar LyX
43541 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43548 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43550 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43551 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43557 Sort environments alphabetically
43559 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43565 Group environments by their category
43567 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43570 \begin_layout Standard
43575 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43591 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43596 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43597 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43601 \begin_layout Subsection
43603 \begin_inset Index idx
43606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 \begin_inset Index idx
43616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43617 Settings ! Shortcuts
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43630 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43632 Several binding files are available, among them:
43635 \begin_layout Description
43636 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43639 \begin_layout Description
43640 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43652 \begin_layout Description
43653 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43665 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43670 , and binding files for special languages.
43671 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43676 \begin_inset space \space{}
43680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43688 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43689 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43690 will try to use the appropriate binding
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 Some binding files, like
43699 , only have a limited scope.
43700 When looking at the end of the file
43704 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43707 \begin_layout Standard
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43720 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43721 in the selected key binding file.
43724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43728 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43733 \begin_inset Index idx
43736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43737 Key Bindings ! Editing
43745 \begin_layout Standard
43746 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43747 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43748 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43749 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43752 Show key-bindings containing
43755 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43756 Insert there for example as keyword
43757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43764 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43765 functions that contain
43766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43774 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43775 All \SpecialChar LyX
43776 functions are also listed in the file
43781 that you will find in the
43788 \begin_layout Standard
43789 For example, to add the shortcut
43797 , select the function and press the
43802 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43803 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43806 \begin_layout Standard
43807 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43808 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43810 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43811 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43813 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43818 \begin_layout Standard
43819 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43823 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43825 The syntax of the entries is:
43828 \begin_layout Standard
43834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43853 \begin_layout Subsection
43855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43857 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43862 \begin_inset Index idx
43865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 \begin_inset Index idx
43875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43876 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43885 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43886 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43887 provides keyboard maps.
43888 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43889 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43901 and select the keyboard map file named
43908 \begin_layout Standard
43917 keyboard map and, if you use the
43921 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43924 arg "keymap-primary"
43930 arg "keymap-secondary"
43933 respectively or toggle between them with
43936 arg "keymap-toggle"
43942 \begin_layout Standard
43943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43960 \begin_layout Standard
43961 You can also specify the mouse
43963 Wheel scrolling speed
43966 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43982 \begin_inset space ~
43987 you can select a key for zooming.
43988 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43991 \begin_layout Subsection
43995 \begin_layout Standard
43996 Input completion is described in section
43997 \begin_inset space ~
44001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44003 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44010 \begin_layout Section
44012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44019 \begin_inset Index idx
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44029 \begin_inset Index idx
44032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 \begin_layout Standard
44042 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44043 are normally determined during
44045 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44048 \begin_layout Description
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44053 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44054 's working directory.
44055 It is the default when you
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44074 \begin_layout Description
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44079 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44081 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44095 \begin_layout Description
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44100 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44106 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44110 \begin_inset Newline newline
44114 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44126 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44127 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44135 \begin_layout Description
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44141 \begin_inset Index idx
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44150 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44151 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44158 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44166 will be used to save the backups.
44167 \begin_inset Newline newline
44170 Backup files have the ending
44171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44181 \begin_layout Description
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44186 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44187 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44189 \begin_inset Newline newline
44196 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44202 You can edit this file with the program
44211 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44212 in its preferences under
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44221 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44226 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44228 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44229 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44235 and \SpecialChar LyX
44236 need to be running the same time.
44237 \begin_inset Newline newline
44240 The pipe is also used for the
44245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44251 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44256 \begin_inset Newline newline
44259 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44260 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44261 \begin_inset Newline newline
44277 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44282 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44285 \begin_layout Description
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44290 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44291 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44292 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44295 \begin_layout Description
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44300 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44306 You only need to specify it if you are using
44310 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44312 For \SpecialChar LyX
44317 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44321 \begin_layout Description
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44326 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44327 When \SpecialChar LyX
44328 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44329 to find it on the system.
44330 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44332 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44341 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44342 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44345 \begin_layout Description
44347 \begin_inset space ~
44350 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44351 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44352 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44353 code or in the document
44355 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44357 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44358 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44359 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44360 scanned for the input files.
44361 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44362 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44364 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44365 compilation may fail for some documents.
44368 \begin_layout Section
44372 \begin_layout Standard
44373 Here you can insert your
44382 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44390 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44394 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44397 \begin_layout Section
44399 \begin_inset Index idx
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 Language ! Settings
44409 \begin_inset Index idx
44412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 Settings ! Language
44421 \begin_layout Subsection
44423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44425 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44432 \begin_layout Description
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44441 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44443 You can find its actual translation status here:
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44446 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44453 \begin_layout Description
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44458 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44459 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44460 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44461 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44478 The most widespread language package is
44483 \begin_inset Index idx
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44495 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44496 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44497 come with the alternative
44503 \begin_inset Index idx
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44508 -packages ! polyglossia
44513 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44514 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44520 The available selections are described in section
44521 \begin_inset space ~
44525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44527 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44534 \begin_layout Description
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44539 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44540 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44541 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44542 An example is the start command
44548 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44550 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44554 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44569 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44574 \begin_layout Description
44576 \begin_inset space ~
44584 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44585 command toggles the package on and off.
44588 \begin_layout Description
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44594 \begin_inset space ~
44597 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44601 \begin_layout Description
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44607 \begin_inset space ~
44610 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44614 \begin_layout Description
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44623 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44624 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44625 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44627 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44634 \begin_layout Description
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44639 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44641 When this option is not set, the
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44649 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44651 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44662 \begin_layout Description
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44676 When it is not set, the
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44684 is set to the end of the document.
44687 \begin_layout Description
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44696 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44697 language will be underlined in blue.
44700 \begin_layout Description
44702 \begin_inset space ~
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44709 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44710 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44713 \begin_layout Description
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44718 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44719 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44720 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44721 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44724 \begin_layout Subsection
44728 \begin_layout Standard
44729 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44736 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44743 \begin_layout Section
44747 \begin_layout Subsection
44751 \begin_layout Description
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44757 \begin_inset space ~
44760 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44763 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44764 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44772 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44775 \begin_layout Description
44777 \begin_inset space ~
44781 \begin_inset Index idx
44784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 \begin_inset Index idx
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44795 Settings ! Date format
44800 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44801 \begin_inset Newline newline
44805 \begin_inset Flex URL
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44816 \begin_inset Newline newline
44819 For example the format
44820 \begin_inset Newline newline
44824 \begin_inset Newline newline
44827 prints the date as day/month/year.
44830 \begin_layout Description
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44839 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44840 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44843 \begin_layout Description
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44848 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44850 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44858 For a detailed description see section
44860 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44865 \begin_inset space ~
44873 \begin_layout Subsection
44879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44881 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44886 \begin_inset Index idx
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44890 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44899 \begin_layout Description
44901 \begin_inset space ~
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44916 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44921 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44942 are used for Cyrillic.
44943 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44956 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44958 sets up in the background.
44959 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44962 \begin_layout Description
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset space ~
44971 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44976 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44980 \begin_layout Description
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44994 \begin_inset space ~
44997 options They only have an effect when the program
45001 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45004 \begin_layout Standard
45005 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45006 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45007 manuals of the applications.
45010 \begin_layout Description
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45015 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45022 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45029 \begin_layout Description
45031 \begin_inset space ~
45034 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45041 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45048 \begin_layout Description
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45053 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45060 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45067 \begin_layout Description
45073 \begin_inset space ~
45076 command Command for the program
45078 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45081 that is described in the section
45083 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45088 Additional Features
45093 \begin_layout Standard
45094 There are additionally the following options:
45097 \begin_layout Description
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45103 \begin_inset space ~
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45119 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45137 to separate folders.
45138 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45140 \begin_inset Index idx
45143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45150 \begin_inset Index idx
45153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45187 changes Removes all manually set
45193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45201 dialog when changing the document class.
45204 \begin_layout Section
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45210 \begin_inset Index idx
45213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45222 \begin_layout Subsection
45224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45226 name "subsec:Converters"
45231 \begin_inset Index idx
45234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 \begin_layout Standard
45244 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45245 from one format to another.
45246 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45247 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45259 field and press the
45264 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45273 drop-down list, modify the
45277 field and press the
45284 \begin_layout Standard
45287 Converter File Cache
45293 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45295 Maximum Age (in days
45298 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45299 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45302 \begin_layout Standard
45303 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45304 definition, is described in the section
45315 \begin_layout Subsection
45317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45319 name "sec:File-Formats"
45324 \begin_inset Index idx
45327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45334 \begin_inset Index idx
45337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45357 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45360 \begin_layout Standard
45361 You can also define the
45363 Default output format
45365 that is used when you use
45367 View, Update, View Master Document
45371 Update Master Document
45377 menu or the toolbar.
45380 \begin_layout Standard
45381 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45392 \begin_layout Standard
45393 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45395 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45396 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45397 This is done by specifying a
45402 More about this is described in the section
45413 \begin_layout Chapter
45414 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45416 \begin_inset Index idx
45419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45428 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45435 \begin_layout Standard
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45443 reference "tab:Units"
45447 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45448 and used in this documentation.
45451 \begin_layout Standard
45452 \begin_inset Float table
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45459 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 \begin_inset Tabular
45486 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45487 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45488 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45489 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45696 scaled point (65536
45697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45775 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45848 % of original image width
45853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 \begin_layout Chapter
46166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46168 name "chap:Credits"
46175 \begin_layout Standard
46176 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46177 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46180 \begin_layout Itemize
46183 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46186 \begin_layout Itemize
46192 \begin_layout Itemize
46198 \begin_layout Itemize
46204 \begin_layout Itemize
46210 \begin_layout Itemize
46216 \begin_layout Itemize
46222 \begin_layout Itemize
46228 \begin_layout Itemize
46231 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46234 \begin_layout Itemize
46240 \begin_layout Itemize
46246 \begin_layout Itemize
46252 \begin_layout Itemize
46258 \begin_layout Itemize
46264 \begin_layout Itemize
46270 \begin_layout Itemize
46276 \begin_layout Itemize
46282 \begin_layout Itemize
46283 The \SpecialChar LyX
46285 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46294 \begin_layout Standard
46295 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46298 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46305 \begin_layout Bibliography
46306 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46307 LatexCommand bibitem
46313 The \SpecialChar LyX
46315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46318 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46323 \begin_inset Newline newline
46327 \begin_inset Flex URL
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46340 \begin_layout Bibliography
46341 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46342 LatexCommand bibitem
46343 key "latexcompanion"
46347 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46349 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46350 Companion Second Edition.
46353 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46356 \begin_layout Bibliography
46357 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46358 LatexCommand bibitem
46363 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46366 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46370 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46373 \begin_layout Bibliography
46374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46375 LatexCommand bibitem
46383 : A Document Preparation System.
46386 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46389 \begin_layout Bibliography
46390 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46391 LatexCommand bibitem
46400 The \SpecialChar TeX
46404 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46407 \begin_layout Bibliography
46408 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46409 LatexCommand bibitem
46414 The \SpecialChar TeX
46416 \begin_inset Newline newline
46420 \begin_inset Flex URL
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46433 \begin_layout Bibliography
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46435 LatexCommand bibitem
46440 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46442 \begin_inset Newline newline
46446 \begin_inset Flex URL
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46459 \begin_layout Bibliography
46460 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46461 LatexCommand bibitem
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46469 name "Documentation"
46470 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46476 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46480 \begin_inset Newline newline
46484 \begin_inset Flex URL
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46489 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46497 \begin_layout Bibliography
46498 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46499 LatexCommand bibitem
46505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46507 name "Documentation"
46508 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46512 how to use the program
46514 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46518 \begin_inset Newline newline
46522 \begin_inset Flex URL
46525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46527 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46535 \begin_layout Bibliography
46536 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46537 LatexCommand bibitem
46543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46545 name "Documentation"
46546 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46555 \begin_inset Newline newline
46559 \begin_inset Flex URL
46562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46572 \begin_layout Bibliography
46573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46574 LatexCommand bibitem
46580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46582 name "Documentation"
46583 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46592 \begin_inset Newline newline
46596 \begin_inset Flex URL
46599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46609 \begin_layout Bibliography
46610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46611 LatexCommand bibitem
46617 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46619 name "Documentation"
46620 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46624 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46626 \begin_inset Newline newline
46630 \begin_inset Flex URL
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46635 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46643 \begin_layout Bibliography
46644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46645 LatexCommand bibitem
46651 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46653 name "Documentation"
46654 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46658 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46664 \begin_inset Index idx
46667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46669 -packages ! caption
46675 \begin_inset Newline newline
46679 \begin_inset Flex URL
46682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46684 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46692 \begin_layout Bibliography
46693 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46694 LatexCommand bibitem
46700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46702 name "Documentation"
46703 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46707 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46713 \begin_inset Index idx
46716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 -packages ! enumitem
46724 \begin_inset Newline newline
46728 \begin_inset Flex URL
46731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46733 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46741 \begin_layout Bibliography
46742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46743 LatexCommand bibitem
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46751 name "Documentation"
46752 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46756 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46762 \begin_inset Index idx
46765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46767 -packages ! fancyhdr
46773 \begin_inset Newline newline
46777 \begin_inset Flex URL
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46782 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46790 \begin_layout Bibliography
46791 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46792 LatexCommand bibitem
46798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46800 name "Documentation"
46801 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46805 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46811 \begin_inset Index idx
46814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46816 -packages ! hyperref
46822 \begin_inset Newline newline
46826 \begin_inset Flex URL
46829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46831 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46839 \begin_layout Bibliography
46840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46841 LatexCommand bibitem
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46849 name "Documentation"
46850 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46854 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46860 \begin_inset Index idx
46863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 -packages ! nomencl
46871 \begin_inset Newline newline
46875 \begin_inset Flex URL
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46880 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46888 \begin_layout Bibliography
46889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46890 LatexCommand bibitem
46896 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46898 name "Documentation"
46899 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46903 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46909 \begin_inset Index idx
46912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46914 -packages ! prettyref
46920 \begin_inset Newline newline
46924 \begin_inset Flex URL
46927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46929 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46937 \begin_layout Bibliography
46938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46939 LatexCommand bibitem
46945 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46947 name "Documentation"
46948 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46952 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46958 \begin_inset Index idx
46961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46963 -packages ! refstyle
46969 \begin_inset Newline newline
46973 \begin_inset Flex URL
46976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46978 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46986 \begin_layout Bibliography
46987 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46988 LatexCommand bibitem
46994 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46997 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47001 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47003 \begin_inset Newline newline
47007 \begin_inset Flex URL
47010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47012 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47020 \begin_layout Bibliography
47021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47022 LatexCommand bibitem
47028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47031 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47035 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47037 \begin_inset Newline newline
47041 \begin_inset Flex URL
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47046 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47054 \begin_layout Bibliography
47055 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47056 LatexCommand bibitem
47062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47065 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47069 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47070 for Cyrillic languages:
47071 \begin_inset Newline newline
47075 \begin_inset Flex URL
47078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47080 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47088 \begin_layout Bibliography
47089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47090 LatexCommand bibitem
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47099 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47103 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47105 \begin_inset Newline newline
47109 \begin_inset Flex URL
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47114 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47122 \begin_layout Bibliography
47123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47124 LatexCommand bibitem
47130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47133 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47137 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47139 \begin_inset Newline newline
47143 \begin_inset Flex URL
47146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47156 \begin_layout Bibliography
47157 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47158 LatexCommand bibitem
47164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47167 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47171 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47173 \begin_inset Newline newline
47177 \begin_inset Flex URL
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47182 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47190 \begin_layout Bibliography
47191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47192 LatexCommand bibitem
47198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47201 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47205 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47207 \begin_inset Newline newline
47211 \begin_inset Flex URL
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47216 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47224 \begin_layout Bibliography
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47226 LatexCommand bibitem
47232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47235 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47239 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47241 \begin_inset Newline newline
47245 \begin_inset Flex URL
47248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47250 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47258 \begin_layout Bibliography
47259 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47260 LatexCommand bibitem
47266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47269 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47273 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47275 \begin_inset Newline newline
47279 \begin_inset Flex URL
47282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47284 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47292 \begin_layout Bibliography
47293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47294 LatexCommand bibitem
47300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47303 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47307 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47309 \begin_inset Newline newline
47313 \begin_inset Flex URL
47316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47318 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47326 \begin_layout Bibliography
47327 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47328 LatexCommand bibitem
47334 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47337 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47341 about new features in
47347 \begin_inset Newline newline
47351 \begin_inset Flex URL
47354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47356 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47364 \begin_layout Standard
47365 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47399 \begin_inset Note Note
47402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47409 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47410 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47411 bibliography is the second one:
47419 \begin_layout Standard
47420 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47421 LatexCommand bibtex
47422 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47423 options "biblio/alphadin"
47430 \begin_layout Standard
47431 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47435 \begin_layout Standard
47436 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47437 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47443 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47444 LatexCommand printindex